Home

Tektronix Phaser 600 User's Manual

1. OCCASIONAL CLEANING Make sure the fuser shuttle is pushed to the far right or left then close the exit cover If it is open close the top cover and press down on the latch When the printer warms up the front panel displays Ready Reinstall the media roll and close the paper roll cover OCCASIONAL CLEANING Ink loader Clean the ink loader if you notice these symptoms m Ink sticks do not fall when the slider s are pulled back m Sliders do not move easily sticking m Ink loader jams Follow these steps to clean the ink loader Open ink loader cover 2 Remove any ink sticks that are still in the ink loader Use a pair of tweezers or a sharp knife NOTE x 4 a If you need to remove the ink loader first remove all ink sticks from the ink loader Refer to Removing the ink loader for instructions OCCASIONAL CLEANING Insert an alcohol moistened swab into each opening and wipe back and forth to remove any ink residue Clean the bottom opening for each color a Using an alcohol swab wipe all parts of the belt that are accessible Wipe the opening around the belt that may have ink build up 9480 32 OCCASIONAL CLEANING 5 After cleaning the ink loader reload the ink sticks and close the cover OCCASIONAL CLEANING Cle
2. Line 1 II Displays status messages such as 9480 12 0D Ready and Printing Displays operation errors and warnings such as Ink Loader Low Displays the names of menus and parameters you can set Line 2 a In interactive mode displays button labels such as lt for previous and gt for next for moving through selections in a given menu Menu for access to a menu of selections and Print and Select to make selections In normal operating mode displays printer information when the button is pressed and held down For a roadmap to the front panel menu selections turn to Front panel menu map FRONT PANEL Printer information Printer Info The first button on the front panel 1 allows Print Quality Enhanced you to access the following information from the printer s current settings this information O appears on the lower line of the front panel display 2 9480 89 Printer name The name assigned to the printer by the system administrator Media Size Current print job or front panel setting for media size Print Quality Current print job or front panel setting for Print Quality Standard Enhanced Fusing Current print job or front panel setting for media fusing Hot Cold None Cutting Current print job or front panel setting for media cutting Per Page Per Job Off Configuration Standard or Extended Features amount of installed RAM Extended Standard
3. General guidelines Keep a document or design simple and consistent Select colors that look good together and that reinforce your message Check your application for standard palettes to get you started Use a color scheme of five or six shades and in a series of images use the colors in a consistent manner throughout the series Use color to show relationships between objects such as a range of values Objects with a similar meaning or value should be in similar colors Avoid red and green combinations these colors are hard for people with red green color blindness to distinguish Avoid red and blue combinations these colors cause the eye to focus at different lengths COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Color corrections making the best selection TekColor corrections The printer s TekColor color correction options provide simulations of different color devices Follow these basic guidelines so that the printer accurately reproduces the colors you want on your prints E For graphic arts purposes there are four printing press standards to choose from SWOP Press Specifications for Web Offset Publications Commercial Press SNAP Press and Euroscale Press For engineering and scientific imaging applications try printing with the Simulate Display option For typical business and office printing select the Vivid Color option before printing Color corrections can be selected from printer dri
4. MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Extracting files from unix tar The file unix tar contains all the shell scripts and other files needed for network configuration in UNIX environments The file is in UNIX tar format Click on the following topics for more information m Listing the contents of unix tar a Extracting the files MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Listing the contents of unix tar Type this command tar tvf directory name unix tar Where directory name is the mount point or the directory that contains the file For example tar tvf mnt unix tar MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Extracting the files Change cd to the directory on your workstation where you want the files to reside Type this command tar xvf directory name unix tar Where directory name is the mount point or the directory that contains the file For example tar xvf mnt unix tar Tektronix Z USING PRINTER UTILITIES Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer In addition to using the printer s front panel or the options in a supported driver the printer s utility files offer another method for changing the way the printer operates In some cases a selection can only be made with a utility file Click on the following topics for more information Installing the utility files Downloading files to the printer Changing the printer s name Resetting the printer
5. Printer not printing even though you ve configured a supported driver for your printer cont d Windows users general m Check to make sure that you have configured the communications ports and the Handshake option correctly Refer to Printing the configuration page for helpful information m Make sure that you are using the correct cables for your computer and printer See Ordering Interface cables and adapters for information a Turn off spooling Print Manager Windows 3 1 users using the Tektronix driver m Make sure that your printer is connected to the port you selected in the drivers Printers Connect dialog box Try resetting the Transmission Retry timeout option in the driver s Printers Connect dialog box to 950 seconds Check the Options dialog box to make sure that Printer not Encapsulated PostScript File is selected in the driver s Print To box If the error message Windows Header has not been downloaded to the printer appears on your computer screen open the driver s Options dialog box and turn on the Send Header with Each Job check box SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution Printer not printing even though you ve configured a supported driver for your printer cont d Windows 95 users m Make sure that your printer is connected to the port you selected in the driver s Details tab m Try resetting the Transmission Retry
6. SETTING UP THE PRINTER Removing the shipping blocks CAUTION The shipping blocks inside the exit cover must be removed before turning on the power otherwise you will damage the printer Open the exit cover a Push down on the latch b Use the exit cover handle to rotate the cover down 9480 116 WARNING When lowering the exit cover be careful not to pinch your hand between the paper roll cover and the exit cover SETTING UP THE PRINTER 2 Remove the blocks 3 Close the exit cover 9480 134 SETTING UP THE PRINTER Attaching the ink loader Remove the ink loader and the screw from the packaging Slide the ink loader into the printer as shown Insert the screw into the opening on the rear side of the ink loader and printer to secure the ink loader to the printer tighten the screw by hand no tools are necessary 9480 42 Remove the adhesive tape that secures the four sliders SETTING UP THE PRINTER Loading the ink Remove the ColorStix ink sticks from their packaging by peeling off the paper cover Open the ink loader cover Insert the ColorStix ink sticks into the appropriate holes for each color Each color ink stick is uniquely shaped to make ink loading easy Load the ink sticks from the bottom of the ink loader to the top 9480 05 UTION Load only one ink stick in each slot otherwise the ink sticks might jam and the cover will not close Do not load
7. Select Paper Size and Source TE sy v Selecting Printer Folder Setting as the Paper Source uses the default setting made under Document Defaults in the Printers folder To change this setting select a different Source in Page Setup Click on the Printer button another Page Setup dialog box appears You can select a different printer here Click on the Properties button the Printer Document Properties sheet appears PRINTING FROM A PC 5 Click the Advanced tab to change any printer features including TekColor This tab displays the same information as the Document Defaults Properties Advanced tab 6 Click the Page Setup tab to see other features This tab displays the same information as the Document Default Properties Page Setup tab NOTE wy v Changes to any of these settings overrides the Defaults Printer Properties settings in the Printers folder PRINTING FROM A PC Selecting printer options from the Control Panel To view a printer s Default Document Properties Open the Printers folder With the right mouse button click on the printer s icon With the left mouse button click on Document Defaults Click the Advanced tab to change any printer features including TekColor Click the Page Setup tab to see other features Document properties set from an application always override document defaults set in the printer s Properties sheets However if an application does not set a document property such
8. To keep your warranty valid you must first empty the waste bin remove the ink sticks from the ink loader detach the ink loader replace the transit restraint on the printhead then ship the printer in its Tektronix shipping box with the appropriate packing materials Call Tektronix at 1 800 835 6100 or your nearest Tektronix dealer for replacement packaging CAUTION To keep your warranty valid you must first empty the waste bin remove the ink sticks from the ink loader detach the ink loader replace the transit restraint on the printhead then ship the printer in its Tektronix shipping box with the appropriate packing materials Call Tektronix at 1 800 835 6100 or your nearest Tektronix dealer for replacement packaging Tektronix TROUBLESHOOTING Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer If you need help If you need assistance contact your local Tektronix dealer or sales representative or any of these listed resources Type of service How to access Details Product Support Hotline 1 800 835 6100 Monday through Friday US amp Canada 6 00 am to 5 00 pm PST Printer service 1 800 835 6100 US Monday through Friday 1 800 563 1289 Canada 6 00 am to 5 00 pm PST Outside US amp Canada contact local Tektronix dealer or office The Tektronix Bulletin Board 503 685 4504 24 hours day 7 days week Service BBS Online services Technical support support ColorPrinters tek com World Wide Web http Awww tek co
9. Follow the instructions in Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printer s CD ROM to install the printer s software Open the Advance Media utility file in a text editor as plain text and locate the following line MyAdvanceDistance 72 def Replace 72 with the distance you want measured in points Save the file renaming the file if desired Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu MODIFYING THE ADVANCE MEDIA DEFAULT Select the Advance Media utility file you just modified in the list then click Open This file was installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the Phaser Tools folder At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type in a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue MODIFYING THE ADVANCE MEDIA DEFAULT Modifying Advance Media from a PC See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files Open the ADVMEDIA PS utility file in a text editor as plain text and locate the following line MyAdvanceDistance 72 def Replace 72 with the distance you want mea
10. Color correction Color corrections Print m None default Print Options a Vivid Color Color Correction Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Custom Profile Fusing Mode Fusing Mode Print a Cold Media Fusing Print Options a Hot Fusing Mode m None Cut Media Cut Media Print m Never Print Options m After each page Cut Media m After each job PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver Adobe PSPrinter and Apple LaserWriter 8 x cont d Feature Description Driver selection Advance Media m Never m After each page After each job a Allow Hot Fusing Advance Media Print Print Options Advance Media Print Preview a On m Off Available only with the Extended Features option Print Preview Print Print Options Print Preview Page Rotation O degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees Page Rotation Print Print Options Page Rotation Page Centering a On a Off Page Centering Print Print Options m Page Centering PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver Adobe PSPrinter and Apple LaserWriter 8 x cont d Feature Description Driver selection Image Smoothing a On m Off Image Smoothing Print Print Options Image Smoothing Color Control Strip a On a Off Color Control Strip Print Print Options m Colo
11. Custom Install or Easy Install Installer options Software Description MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Installed folder Custom Install Easy Install Adobe PSPrinter Driver 8 3 1 Phaser 600 Driver Phaser 600 GX Driver Printer Descriptions Screen Fonts ColorSync Profile Samplers QuarkXPress PDF File PhaserPrint Photoshop Plug in Adobe Acrobat Reader LaserWriter 8 3 2 Driver Driver for use with all non GX Macintosh systems Custom driver based on the LaserWriter 7 1 2 printer driver Driver for use with QuickDraw GX PPDs for use with drivers and applications Screen fonts to match the printer s fonts Printer profile for use with ColorSync 2 0 Color sampler charts and a fonts sampler File for use with the QuarkXPress application Custom plug in for printing from Adobe Photoshop Installs the alias to the Acrobat Reader installer onto your hard disk Installs the alias to the Apple LaserWriter driver installer onto your hard disk System Folder Extensions System Folder Extensions System Folder Extensions System Folder Extensions Printer Descriptions System Folder Fonts System Folder Preferences ColorSync Profiles PhaserTools Samplers QuarkXPress application folder PDF Photoshop application folder Plugs ins Acquire Export Installs alias to Acrobat Reader installer in PhaserTools folder Installs alias to the LaserWriter installer in P
12. Detach the ink loader from the printer and repack it in its original shipping box REPACKING AND MOVING THE PRINTER Clean up Use a lint free cloth to wipe off any dirt dust or oil in and on the printer Repack any other accessories in the original Tektronix shipping box es If you do not have the original Tektronix shipping boxes contact Tektronix for a repackaging kit REPACKING AND MOVING THE PRINTER Repack the printer 1 Re insert these shipping restraints a Transit restraint for the printhead b Shipping blocks for the fuser c Shipping block for the top cover latch Close all doors and secure them with adhesive tape Retract the leveling legs under the printer this allows clearance for the printer to move freely on its wheels Unlock the front casters push the locking lever to the up position Attach the pallet ramps to the pallet refer to the Phaser 600 Repacking Instructions Carefully guide the printer onto the pallet REPACKING AND MOVING THE PRINTER A RNING Because of its size and weight always use two people to move the printer off or onto the ramps Failure to do so may injure a person or damage the printer Secure the printer to the pallet with the original packing materials Repack the printer in the original Tektronix shipping box If you need replacement packaging contact Tektronix for the Repackaging Kit 9 Use the restrapping kit to secure the printer and its components
13. Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file PRINTING THE STARTUP PAGE Printing the startup page with PhaserLink software Refer to the PhaserShare Status Software User Manual for information on using your World Wide Web browser to access the printer ENABLING AND DISABLING THE STARTUP PAGE Enabling and disabling the startup page You can choose to have a startup page print each time the printer is turned on or reset or you can disable the startup page You can enable and disable printing of the startup page in several ways m Enabling and disabling the startup page from the front panel a Enabling and disabling the startup page with a downloadable utility file m Enabling and disabling the startup page with PhaserLink software 1 ENABLING AND DISABLING THE STARTUP PAGE Enabling and disabling the startup page from the front panel While the Ready message is displayed press the Menu button The printer displays the first item in the setup menu Help Pages Z Menu Using the left arrow lt or right arrow gt buttons scroll through the selections until the following message appears Printer Defaults Z Menu Press the Menu button to access the printer defaults settings Using the left arrow lt or right arrow gt buttons scroll through the selections until the follow
14. a From Windows 95 EI From DOS and Windows 3 1 POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS From Windows 3 1 Open the Control Panel from the Main menu Double click the Printers icon to open the Printers dialog box Click the Connect button to open the Connect dialog box Increase the Transmission Retry to 950 seconds by typing in the new number Click OK POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS From Windows 95 Click the Start icon in the taskbar on your screen a menu appears Move the cursor over Settings another menu appears In the menu click Printers the Printers window appears In the Printers window select the Phaser 600 printer icon then select Properties from the File menu Click the Details tab and increase the Transmission Retry to 950 seconds by typing in the new number Click OK POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS From DOS and Windows 3 1 NOTE sy v To use this procedure the printer must be connected directly to your computer not on a network At the DOS prompt issue the DOS MODE command by typing the following MODE LPT1 P Start Windows 3 1 Open the Control Panel from the Main menu Double click the Printers icon to open the Printers dialog box Click the Connect button to open the Connect dialog box Change the port selection from LPT1 to either LPT1 DOS or LPT1 0S2 depending on the options you see in the dialog box Click OK PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED Printed colors are no
15. m Blends adjacent colors so that color transitions are less noticeable Off Never Off On PRINTER LANGUAGES POSTSCRIPT HP GL Printer languages PostScript HP GL The printer supports PostScript Level 1 and Level 2 and HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language printer languages The default language for the parallel port is PostScript For information on default language for other interface ports refer to the PhaserShare Network Cards and Software System Administrator Manual If you want to print HP GL files on a port set to PostScript you must set up that printer port for that type of data or enable Adobe IntelliSelect automatic language selection Refer to Using Different Printer Language Modes or Tektronix World Wide Web site for instructions If automatic language selection is enabled you can send PostScript and HP GL files when enabled to the printer and the printer automatically detects the type of file and prints it You can change the default language so that the next time you turn on the printer it is set to receive PostScript or HP GL data on a specific port The printer has default values for the HP GL parameters such as pen color and pen width However you can change these values Refer to Setting default HP GL pen colors or Tektronix World Wide Web site for instructions Fonts NOTE sy vV For general information on fonts request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL the Tektronix
16. 36 x 48 in 35 5 x 46 82 in Sizes not available in the front panel cannot be selected as the default media size ALL ABOUT MEDIA Metric Cut sheet media sizes Metric Cut sheet media sizes Media Size Print area U S sizes ANSI A 216 x 279 mm 206 x 249 mm ANSI B 279 x 432 mm 268 3 x 401 mm ANSI C 432 x 559 mm 419 95 x 528 8 mm ANSI D 559 x 864 mm 547 29 x 833 6 mm ANSI E 864 x 1118 mm 853 4 x 1087 6 mm ISO metric ISO A4 210 x 297 mm 268 3 x 401 mm ISO A3 297 x 420 mm 284 5 x 390 mm ISO A2 420 x 594 mm 409 x 564 mm ISO A1 594 x 841 mm 583 x 810 94 mm a ISO AO 841 x 1189 mm 829 x 1158 9 mm Misc m 30 x 42 in 762 x 1066 mm 750 5 x 1036 8 mm Sizes not available in the front panel cannot be selected as the default media size Metric Cut sheet media sizes cont d Media Size ALL ABOUT MEDIA Print area JIS metric JIS B4 257 x 364 mm 246 5 x 334 mm JIS B3 364 x 515 mm 352 2 x 485 14 mm JIS B2 515 x 728 mm 504 x 698 2 mm JIS B1 728 x 1030 mm 718 x 1000 mm Architectural Arch A 228 6 x 305 mm 216 5 3 x 274 8mm Arch B 305 x 457 mm 292 6 x 427 2 mm Arch C 457 x 610 mm 447 x 579 63 mm am Arch D 610 x 914 mm 598 7 x 884 4 mm m Arch E 914 x 1219 mm 902 2 x 1189 2 mm Sizes not available in the front panel cannot be selected as the default media
17. 8MB 24MB 40MB Help Pages 2 7 Menu gt Media Defaults vere 4 7 Menu gt Printer Defaults Ce Serial Settings amp CD Menu gt Front panel menu map Menu Map Configuration Page Startup Page Media Size Media Cutting Media Fusing an j Print Quality Image Smoothing TekColor Correction Startup Page SCSI Startup Mode PS Error Handler cr Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Flow Control P Print Quality Standard default Enhanced FRONT PANEL TekColor Correction None default Vivid Color Display SWOP Euroscale Commercial SNAP Monochrome FRONT PANEL Pause Menu Ready Network Settings A 5 P M eee TCP IP NetWare COo a a EtherTalk HTTP II Paused C5 Reprint Feed Test Print Unlock Waste Bin Clean Head Change Fuser or Cutter Clean Paper Clamp Reprint Xx 5S Scale Copies Print_ Engine Copy Count High Altitude FW Version ColorStix Usage Fault History Scale 100 9 Cee C gt Select Language English default Deutsch Espa ol Italiano Copies 1 FET o M gt pies lt Quenu Fran ais Japanese X Appears when optional PhaserShare card is installed A xk With Extended Features FRONT PANEL Pause menu Pause Menu CS Pause Men
18. Features The Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer is a Tektronix solid ink printer that is capable of printing brilliant colors on a variety of media paper clear and white polyester film sign vinyl image transfer film newsprint and canvas to name a few The printer is capable of printing on sheet fed media in a variety of sizes up to Architectural E size 36 x 48 inches as well as roll fed media for printing posters large banners and signage Standard configuration In its standard configuration the printer provides 8 Mbytes of memory a total of 17 fonts support for PhaserMatch custom color matching profiler and PhaserLink Tektronix online control of printer features and access to printer information through a standard web browser Additional memory 16 Mbytes or 32 Mbytes for improved performance is optionally available Extended Features option The Extended Features option adds 22 fonts for a total of 39 and support for the Phaser Copystation Print Preview and Reprint features Additional memory 16 Mbytes or 32 Mbytes for improved performance is optionally available Some of the Phaser 600 printer s features include Wide format Networking Internal RIP Raster Image Processor Tektronix proprietary ColorStix ink sticks Automatic high capacity ink loader Media flexibility and independence TekColor Dynamic Correction Tektronix exclusive color control technology makes it easy to print th
19. ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic Courier Courier Bold Courier Oblique Courier Bold Oblique Helvetica Helvetica Bold Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Bold Oblique Helvetica Condensed Helvetica Condensed Bold Helvetica Condensed Oblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Oblique Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique New Century Schoolbook New Century Schoolbook Bold New Century Schoolbook Italic New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic Palatino Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic Times Roman Times Bold Times Italic Times Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery ITC Zapf Dingbats 5 4 amp 1 Symbol 2 wu Bo A 9480 60 Downloading fonts The fonts resident in the printer are stored in the printer as outlines and are always available for printing The PostScript interpreter in the printer can also accept and store additional fonts Known as downloadable fonts If you want to print PostScript outline fonts that are not built into the printer you can transfer or download outline fonts from your computer to the printer Downloading fonts saves print time if you plan to print several documents or a large document using those fonts When you download a font it is stored in the printer s memory or on
20. Mirror Print On Macintosh utility files 478 MIRRORON PS PC utility file 478 MODE command using 396 Monochrome color correction description 211 selecting from the front panel 152 selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 mounting PC diskette 414 moving the printer 16 575 MSDS ink _753 N network connections 31 order numbers _740 rear panel ports 31 printing 655 utilities software 421 No Color Correction color correction description _202 selecting from the front panel 152 selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 No Sys Start Job Macintosh utility file 501 NOSTRTPG PS PC utility file 718 NOSYSTRT PS PC utility file 503 ABCD EF GG O occasional cleaning 545 off set dots 616 OFFSETXY PS PC utility file 470 online services 581 operating location requirements 16 space needed 16 operating mode front panel 686 options Extended Features 2 ordering cables and adapters _732 part numbers and descriptions 732 supplies _729 orientation landscape 173 paper 173 portrait 173 output bin attaching 26 overview of software installation 47 P packing materials 17 repacking 579 Page Centering 229 Page Offset XY Macintosh utility file 468 Page Rotation 174 230 Page Rotation Macintosh utility files 478 JK LM N OPQ page sizes custom 241 PageMaker PageMaker 5 0 PANTONE color library file M
21. Press the Menu button the printer displays this message Test Print lt gt Menu Press the arrow button until you see this message Clean Paper Clamp lt gt Select Press the Select button This raises the paper clamp The front panel displays this message Ose 169 Cones OCCASIONAL CLEANING Cleaning the back tension blade WARNING The back tension blade the steel belt behind it and the paper clamp are very sharp To avoid personal injury make sure that you use the cleaning tool and keep your hands away from the blade and belt NOTE sy Y For better visibility you can pull the printer away from the wall and access it from behind If the lint free cloth has not been folded fold it in thirds as shown Insert the folded edge of the cloth into the V opening of the cleaning tool 2 Wrap the cloth around the edges of the tool as shown OCCASIONAL CLEANING If you are using a dry cloth moisten it with 90 pure isopropyl alcohol Pull forward on the back tension blade s handle and hold it in that position this lifts the blade away from the drum Use your fingers to hold the cloth against the tool Position the tool under the blade it notches onto the blade to serve as a guide cleaning the front and back of the blade at the same time Clean one section of the blade by wiping back and forth 3 4 times with pressure Switch hands to clean the other end of the blade TE
22. Printing Pantone Colors from an application 313 Printing Pantone Colors from a Macintosh application 314 Printing PANTONE Colors from a PC Windows application 316 USING THE PHASERPRINT PLUG IN FOR PHOTOSHOP 318 Overview 319 Compatibility 320 Installing the PhaserPrint plug in for Photoshop 321 Installing the plug in for Macintosh 322 Installing the plug in for Windows 323 Using the plug in 325 Starting the PhaserPrint plug in 326 Selecting options in the PhaserPrint dialog box 328 USING THE PHASER 600 GX DRIVER 364 System requirements 367 Installing the Phaser 600 GX printer driver 368 Creating a desktop printer 369 Setting up unique desktop printers 371 Printing with a desktop printer 372 Using the Printing menu 373 Setting up a shared printer 382 Using a shared printer 383 Printing from QuickDraw GX applications 384 Printing from non QuickDraw GX applications 388 Viewing printer status 390 Disabling QuickDraw GX 391 PRINTING FROM DOS 393 Setting up ports 395 Setting up the parallel port 396 Setting up optional interface ports 397 Printing from DOS 398 Using color corrections 399 Using a Tektronix driver 400 Using a non Tektronix driver 401 PRINTING FROM UNIX AND VMS WORKSTATIONS 402 Overview 403 Printing from UNIX workstations 405 Printing from VMS workstations 407 Using the printer s software 408 Obtaining the PC utility files 409 Using the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM 410 Using the utility files 411 Moun
23. and utility files work with the drivers to provide the best access to printer features See Ordering Information PRINTING HINTS Getting the largest printed picture To get the largest printed picture keep in mind the following The area of media that the printer prints on is smaller than the size of the media refer to Margins and print area for more details You may have to adjust the margins in your application software The largest predefined page size is Arch E 36 x 48 in but the printer can print up to 36 in x 150 ft 914 mm x 45 7 m IMPROVING PRINT SPEED Improving print speed There are different ways to improve print soeed such as by upgrading to EtherTalk on a Macintosh to Novell on a PC or to TCP IP on a workstation For more information request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL the Tektronix automated fax systems Refer to If you need help for instructions on using these systems Click on the following topics for more information Relative port speed Fastest print time m Printing bitmapped images IMPROVING PRINT SPEED Relative port speed Ethernet and Token Ring are the fastest ports followed by the parallel port the LocalTalk port then the serial port IMPROVING PRINT SPEED Fastest print time The total print time depends on the following Image complexity Image size Type of port used and network traffic Printer s memory configuration Print quality mode F
24. name for saving printer output Use the default name given in the edit box or type ina new name Then click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART Printing the entire chart PC 1 See Installing the PC files if you haven t already installed the files 2 Print the PANTONE Color chart using one of the following methods m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file PRINTING PANTONE COLORS FROM AN APPLICATION Printing Pantone Colors from an application m Printing Pantone Colors from a Macintosh application m Printing PANTONE Colors from a PC Windows application Click Pantone overview to return to the main topics list PRINTING PANTONE COLORS FROM AN APPLICATION Printing Pantone Colors from a Macintosh application Select PANTONE Colors within an application using the colors on the chart Print your document using one of the following methods If you are printing from a supported driver such as Adobe PSPrinter or Phaser 600 GX Print your document with the following selections Any other selections in the driver will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently Set Color C
25. not the cord Disconnect the power plug if the power cord or plug is frayed or otherwise damaged if you spill anything into the case if product is exposed to any excess moisture if product is dropped or damaged if you suspect that the product needs servicing or repair and whenever you clean the product Ground the product Plug the three wire power cord with grounding prong into grounded AC outlets only If necessary contact a licensed electrician to install a properly grounded outlet Symbols as marked on product DANGER high voltage S Protective ground earth terminal Hot object Use caution LN WARNING USERS SAFETY SUMMARY Use caution Refer to the manual s for information A Sharp object Use caution If the product loses the ground connection usage of knobs and controls and other conductive parts can cause an electrical shock Electrical product may be hazardous if misused A BCD EF GH A accessories ink loader 731 ordering 728 729 output bin _731 Phaser Copystation _731 accessories box contents 12 adapters ordering _732 ADDCTRLD BAT PC utility file 471 additional memory 2 738 adjusting printed colors 197 Adobe 54 56 74 139 Illustrator PANTONE color library file Macintosh 292 293 PC 298 IntelliSelect _181 Photoshop plug in Macintosh _71 319 Windows 319 PostScript drivers Macintosh 124 Windows 83 Advance Media cha
26. the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue RESETTING THE PRINTER Resetting the printer from a PC 1 See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files 2 Use one of the following methods to send the RESET PS file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS Using the color rendering intents The color rendering intents are designed for use with images containing colors specified in the PostScript Level 2 international color standard CIE XYZ which was developed by the Commission Internationale de lEclairage International Commission on Illumination Descriptions Each color rendering intent provides a specific type of color matching m Rendering Intent Absolute m Rendering Intent Relative m Rendering Intent Saturation E Rendering Intent Perceptual USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS Rendering Intent Absolute For jobs in which the most important consideration is matching colors exactly to the computer s screen colors This absolute rendering reproduces all colors exactly the white in an image prints exactly as it appears on the computer screen in other words if the white appears to contain a color such as blue or g
27. 1236 mm 48 66 in 737 mm 29 in SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS Safety and emissions standards Listed UL 1950 Information Technology Equipment Certified CSA Standard C22 2 No 950 M 89 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment TUV licensed EN60950 Class B compliant computing device pursuant to sub part J of Part 15 of FCC rules Conforms to EC EN55022 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN50082 1 1992 COPYRIGHTS TRADEMARKS Copyrights Trademarks Copyright Tektronix Inc Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Tektronix Phaser ColorStix and Made For Each Other are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc TekColor PhaserShare PhaserTools PhaserMatch PhaserPrint PhaserSym and PhaserLink are trademarks of Tektronix Inc TekColor Cares is a service mark of Tektronix Inc Adobe PostScript IntelliSelect and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions Adobe Brilliant Screens technology is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions Apple LaserWriter LocalTalk Macintosh and TrueType2 are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Incorporated Times Helvetica and Palatino are trademarks of Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries ITC
28. 159 media rolls 160 image manipulation 179 Image Smoothing 232 mage Smoothing Off Macintosh utility files 478 mage Smoothing On Macintosh utility files 478 improving print speed 620 indicators at power up 35 error 35 power 35 598 601 685 information access PhaserLink 5 NITDISK PS PC utility file 499 nitialize Printer Disk Macintosh utility file 498 initializing a SCSI hard disk from a Macintosh 498 from aPC 499 initializing printer mode 35 ink ink sticks loading _24 jam clearing 676 loader attaching 23 removing 678 MSDS _753 ordering 729 inserting the paper roll holder 42 JK LMNOPQRSTUV W X Y Z installation inventory 11 screen fonts 187 software 46 tasks 10 unpacking 11 interactive mode front panel 687 interface ports 28 internal jam 670 Internet 583 inventory 11 isopropyl alcohol cleaning with 538 J job pipelining 460 job timeout 517 L laminating _251 landscape orientation 173 language modes checking 608 default 181 HP GL 522 PostScript 522 printer 514 language front panel selection 37 LaserWriter Utility using 434 legal information _762 leveling legs adjusting 32 loading cut sheet media _176 ink 24 roll media _39 658 LocalTalk printer name 443 445 problems 609 LPT port setting up 396 Macintosh printer drivers selecting 124 Macintosh screen fonts _187 Macintosh utility files 434 Advance Media 464 CMYK Sampler _256 Configuration Page 702 Cut Media 478
29. 232 Resident typefaces PostScript 183 Fast Preview 234 Printer s Extended Features option 184 Print Preview 235 Downloading fonts 185 Color Control Strip 238 Macintosh screen fonts 187 Reprint 240 Using fonts with Windows 189 Printing font samplers 190 Custom page sizes 241 Phaser Copystation 242 Requirements and suggested memory configuration 243 Connecting the Copystation 244 Setting the print quantity 245 Scaling images from the Copystation 246 Media size interactions 248 Laminating your Phaser 600 prints 251 Tips on laminating prints 252 PRINTING THE COLOR SAMPLER CHARTS Available color charts 256 Setting up the printer 257 If you are using manual feed media 258 If you are using roll media 259 Printing from a Macintosh 260 Installing the files 261 Important preparations 262 Printing the color charts 264 Printing from aPC 268 Installing the files 269 Important preparations 270 Printing the color charts 272 COLOR MATCHING 275 Select your computer type 276 Using ColorSync on a Macintosh 277 Using host color correction in Windows 95 282 UsING PANTONE COLOR FILES 285 Pantone overview 286 Installing Pantone files 287 Installing the Macintosh files 288 Installing the PC files 289 Using the PANTONE Color templates 290 Using the Macintosh templates 291 Using the PC library files 297 Printing the PANTONE Color sampler chart 301 Printing individual pages from Acrobat 302 Printing the entire chart 309
30. A size images on A size media The printer s default media size cannot be set to A size nor can A size be selected in the printer s front panel If you are copying an A size image to print out on A size media follow these steps On the printer s front panel access the Media Size selections in the Media Defaults menu Select ANSI B which is the smallest media size selectable from the front panel On the Copystation s front panel press the Scale button Using the keypad on the Copystation enter 83 the amount necessary to scale a B size image to A size Manually feed an A size sheet of media into the printer Place the item to be copied on the scanner window at the lowest right most position Press the Copystation s Copy button to make a print LAMINATING YOUR PHASER 600 PRINTS Laminating your Phaser 600 prints You can protect your wide format prints using commercially available pressure sensitive and warm temperature under 200 C lamination media For best lamination performance Tektronix offers specially formulated lamination material designed to produce high quality durable prints You can use Tektronix lamination material to laminate Phaser 600 output on any commercially available heat pressure laminator that meets the feature list in the following table Feature description Specification Roll size Upper pressure roller temperature Lower pressure roller temperature Laminator speed Nip pr
31. Avant Guard Gothic ITC Bookman ITC Zapf Chancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation COPYRIGHTS TRADEMARKS MS DOS and Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Novell and NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd SPARC is a registered trademark of SPARC International Incorporated SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International Incorporated licensed exclusively to Sun Microsystems Incorporated Sun Sun Microsystems and Sun Microsystems Computer Corporation are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Incorporated The printer contains an implementation of the LZW algorithm licensed under U S Patent 4 558 302 Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation FTP Software is a registered trademark of FTP Software Incorporated COPYRIGHTS TRADEMARKS PANTONE Colors generated by the Phaser 600 Color Printer are four and or three color process simulations and may not match PANTONE identified solid color standards Use current PANTONE Color Reference Manuals for accurate colors PANTONE Color simulations are only obtainable on these products when driven by qualified Pantone licensed software packages Contact Pantone Inc for a current list of qualified licensees Pantone Inc 19
32. Centronics adapter Adapts your system s existing low density Centronics parallel cable connector to the printer s high density parallel connector Converts 36 pin low density 1284 B plug to 36 pin high density 1284 C plug 012 1465 00 SCSI 2 HD to SCSI 1 LD cable Connects the printer s SCSI port to a hard disk drive or the Phaser Copystation SCSI port 50 pin high density plug to 50 pin low density plug 2 0 meters 6 56 feet 012 1299 00 SCSI 1 LD to Macintosh SCSI cable Combine with 013 0297 00 to connect the printer s SCSI port to a hard disk drive with Macintosh SCSI 25 pin plug 50 pin low density plug to Macintosh SCSI 25 pin plug Order number ORDERING INTERFACE CABLES AND ADAPTERS Description Connectors and cable length 013 0297 00 SCSI 1 LD to SCSI 2 HD adapter Use with either 012 1465 00 or 012 1299 00 to convert a low density SCSI connection to a high density SCSI connection Converts 50 pin low density plug to 50 pin high density plug 012 1379 00 Serial RS 232 Null modem cable Connects the printers serial port to a PC or workstation serial port 9 socket receptacle to 9 socket receptacle 1 8 meters 6 feet 012 1380 00 Serial RS 232 Null modem cable Connects the printer s serial port to a PC or workstation serial port 9 socket receptacle to 25 socket receptacle 1 8 meters 6 feet EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM Expanding
33. Class B level Limits for harmonic current emissions Limitations of voltage fluctuations and flicker Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standard Part 1 Residential Commercial and Light Industry IEC 1000 4 2 1993 ENV50140 1993 IEC 1000 4 4 1003 EN61000 4 11 1993 ENV50141 1993 Following the provision of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directory 89 336 EEC For the EN60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Following the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC FCC CLASs B DEVICE FOR 100 120 VAC EQUIPMENT FCC Class B device for 100 120 VAC equipment The equipment described in this manual generates and uses radio frequency energy If it is not installed and used properly in strict accordance with Tektronix instructions it may cause interference with radio and television reception This equipment has been tested and verified to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interferences in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does caus
34. Click the Phaser 600 printer in the list of printers in the Chooser Click Create to create a desktop printer An icon of the printer appears on the desktop with the same name as the printer selected in the Chooser Close the Chooser MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Setting up the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver Note The LaserWriter 8 driver available only on the printers CD ROM uses printer specific PPD PostScript Printer Description files for information on a printer s page sizes and printing options Follow these steps to use the LaserWriter 8 driver with a Phaser 600 printer If the printer is busy it may take some time to complete this set up procedure do this when the printer is idle You only have to set up a printer once During installation the LaserWriter 8 driver leaves other versions of the LaserWriter driver Such as 7 x and 6 x intact but overwrites an earlier version of the LaserWriter 8 driver 1 Follow the software installation on Installing printer software for Macintosh At Step 3 choose Custom Install then select LaserWriter 8 x Driver and Printer Descriptions 2 Install the driver a In the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk locate the alias to the LaserWriter 8 x Installer Double click on the alias to open the installer application on the printer s CD ROM the CD ROM must be inserted to be accessed c Follow the on screen instructions to install the driver 3 Open the Chooser select
35. Description Driver selection Advance Media m Never m After each page After each job a Allow Hot Fusing Advance Media Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Advance Media Print Preview a On m Off Available only with the Extended Features option Print Preview Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Print Preview Page Rotation O degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees Page Rotation Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Page Rotation Page Centering a On m Off Page Centering Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Page Centering PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver for QuickDraw GX Tektronix Phaser 600 GX cont d Feature Description Driver selection Image Smoothing Image Smoothing a On m Off Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Image Smoothing Color Control Strip Color Control Strip a On a Off Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Color Control Strip Mirror Print Mirror Print a On m Off Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Mirror Print PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Using the Phaser 600 driver From the File menu open the Page Setup dialog box Use the Paper pop up menu to select the printer s Supported paper sizes From the File menu open the Print dialog box Select Manual Feed in the Paper Source field for cut sheet media Click the TekColor button in t
36. Features option is installed It allows you to reprint the last PostScript image with the following options Options a Scale m Enlarges an image up to 400 of the original size an A size image can be scaled to E size Reduces an image to a minimum of 5 of the original size an E size image can be scaled down to A size m Scale to Fit which automatically scales the image to fit the media installed in the printer or if media is not installed the front panel selection m Copies m Allows you to specify the number of copies you want printed SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Custom page sizes Most drivers that support the Phaser 600 printer allow you to set custom page sizes in the Page Size selection area PHASER COPYSTATION Phaser Copystation The Phaser Copystation adds easy to use walk up color copying capability to the Phaser 600 printer Images scanned on the Copystation are sent to the printer through a direct SCSI connection The Copystation is fully compatible with other SCSI devices such as an external SCSI font disk Click on the following topics for more information Requirements and suggested memory configuration Connecting the Copystation Setting the print quantity Scaling images from the Copystation Media size interactions PHASER COPYSTATION Requirements and suggested memory configuration For Copystation capability the Phaser 600 requires the Extended Features option You can also order a
37. NOTE sy v Each time you remove the waste bin be sure to empty it completely Used ink is nontoxic it can be treated as normal office waste EMPTYING THE WASTE BIN Front panel displays Empty Waste Bin NOTE N SE The waste bin is locked during normal operation Do not pull the bin out unless the front panel message is displayed Remove the waste bin by sliding it out You may have to tug gently on the waste bin to remove it Empty the contents of the waste bin by gently twisting it while holding it over a trash bin 9480 13 Replace the waste bin in the printer UTION Do not load used ink into the printer Reusing waste ink ruins the printhead and invalidates the printer warranty EMPTYING THE WASTE BIN Before moving the printer The printer locks the waste bin in place until it needs emptying However you can use the Utilities menu to unlock the waste bin so that you can empty it before the front panel message prompts you to do so 1 When the printer is on and the Ready message appears in the front panel access the Utilities menu by pressing the Menu button then press an arrow button until you see this message Utilities i m gt Menu Press the Menu button Press an arrow button until you see this message Unlock Waste Bin lt gt Select Press the Select button to unlock the waste bin The front panel displays this message Waste Bin Unlocked Remove and empty the waste bi
38. PhaserPrint for UNIX software works with the workstation s native spooling system to print PostScript files and raster files in these formats Sun Raster Format SRF xwd SGI RGB and many others The printer s CD ROM contains a demonstration copy of PhaserPrint for UNIX software and an on line instruction guide in the UN XDEMO directory If you would like to purchase a licensed version of PhaserPrint software contact your dealer local Tektronix office or in the United States call 1 800 835 6100 PRINTING FROM A WORKSTATION VMS workstations To print from VMS workstations the optional PhaserSym utility a VMS print symbiont functions as a driver for selecting printing options and as a queue manager PhaserSym software is compatible with DEC workstations running VAX VMS version 5 0 and later PhaserSym software communicates over the printer s optional TCP IP Ethernet interface and is required for proper communication with the printer The optional EasyCopy X software provides fast raster image printing to Tektronix printers PRINTING FROM A WORKSTATION For more information World Wide Web If you have access to the Internet you can view selected topics on the Phaser 600 printer s web page Access the printer s documentation from this web address http www tek com Color_Printers userdoc introduction html HAL Request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL Tektronix automated fax systems Refer to Usin
39. Print preview Check the box either on or off The Print Preview option is available only with the printer s Extended Features This option lets you print a small thumbnail version of the first page of your print job The image is reduced by one fifth in both height and width or to B size 11 x 17 inches whichever is smaller This preview option saves on the amount of media and the print time that would normally be required for printing the same image at full size This option is best suited for roll media but can also be used with cut sheet media The printable area is indicated around the reduced image with dashed black lines showing page or image placement USING THE PLUG IN Once the preview image is printed the front panel displays the Print Preview message with a choice of three buttons There is a default timeout of 15 minutes while the printer waits for you to press one of the buttons If the time runs out before a button is pressed the job is cancelled and the printer is returned to the ready state Pressing Cancel ends the Print Preview returning the printer to the ready state Pressing Pause enters a Pause menu allowing you to print the reduced image at a different scale Pressing Print prints the full size image and any subsequent pages of the print job The default for this option is off USING THE PLUG IN Mirror print l Check the box either on or off m This option inverts an
40. Utilities menu Select the nitialize Printer Disks file from the list then click Open This file was installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder Atthe prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue If output is returned by the printer you won t see this dialog box check your hard disk for the file the utility created for the printer s output INITIALIZING A FORMATTED SCSI HARD DISK PC and workstation users Refer to PC Windows software for instructions on installing the printer s utility files Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Use one of the following methods to send the N TDISK PS file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file ENABLING AND DISABLING SYSSTART JOB EXECUTION Enabling and disabling SysStart Job execution The Set SysStart Job SYSTART PS file enables automatic execution of a file named SysStart if one is
41. Wide Web site http www tek com Color_Printers Or you can contact Technical Support at 1 800 835 6100 PRINTING FROM A WORKSTATION To use the TekColor color corrections and other printer features use one of the following methods EI UNIX workstations PhaserPrint software for UNIX workstations functions like a printer driver for selecting printing options and provides fast screen copy printing VMS workstations PhaserSym software and EasyCopy X for VMS workstations provides proper communication with the printer The menus on the printer s front panel let you select printing options refer to Using the Front Panel for instructions on using the front panel Downloadable utility files let you select printing options refer to Using Printer Utilities for instructions For more information Lists locations of optional information PRINTING FROM A WORKSTATION UNIX workstations For UNIX environments Tektronix offers the optional PhaserPrint software PhaserPrint for UNIX software offers driver selectable printer options and provides fast raster file and screen copy printing to Tektronix color printers PhaserPrint for UNIX software is available for these workstations Workstation Operating System Sun SunOS 4 1 3 Solaris 2 3 2 4 SGI IRIX 4 0 5 2 5 3 HP 9000 700 800 HPUX 9 0 5 IBM RS 6000 AIX 3 2 DECstation Ultrix 4 0 4 4 DEC Alpha CSE 30 and 3 2 PRINTING FROM A WORKSTATION
42. _28 printer service 581 printer software on CD ROM 51 printer supplies _729 PRINTER INF updating Windows NT driver 118 printhead cleaning 567 printing configuration page 699 features 4 179 features special 221 from a Macintosh _124 from aPC 82 from applications 149 languages 181 menu map 696 on a network 655 PANTONE Colors 644 problems 606 startup page _706 time 623 timeout 610 A BCD EF GH printing press color corrections 205 PRNTCNFG PS PC utility file 704 PRNTSTPG PS PC utility file 711 problems and solutions 596 Product Support Hotline 581 PS Error Handler 596 PSCRIPT PS PC utility file 524 PSTEST PS PC utility file 529 Q Quick Reference Guide attaching 27 ordering _731 QuickDraw GX driver downloading PostScript files 381 437 printing from 141 364 Tektronix printer driver 365 Quick Start Instructions 10 15 R Raw CMYK Colors Macintosh utility file 213 Raw RGB Colors Macintosh utility file 213 RAWCMYK PS PC utility file 213 RAWRGB PS PC utility file 213 registering your printer 14 removing cable ties 17 rename printer 443 445 RENDABS PS PC utility file _458 JK LM N OPQ Rendering Intents Macintosh utility files 458 RENDPER PS PC utility file 458 RENDREL PS PC utility file 458 RENDSAT PS PC utility file 458 repacking the printer 575 578 579 Reprint 4 240 RESET PS PC utility file 447 resetting the printer from a Macintosh 447 from aPC 450 resident typeface
43. as page orientation or paper size the printer defaults to the document properties set in the printer s Document Properties sheets PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Printing from a Macintosh To print from a Macintosh you need a printer driver Installing one of the supported drivers allows you to select printing features right from your computer Without a supported driver you can make some printing selections from the printer s front panel Using Macintosh printer drivers To select printer specific features print from one of the following provided drivers See Print features quick reference Macintosh printer drivers for a list reference tables listing the printing features and how to find them quickly in each of these drivers Phaser 600 driver see Using the Phaser 600 driver Adobe PSPrinter driver see Using the Adobe PSPrinter driver Phaser 600 GX driver see Using the Phaser 600 GX driver Apple LaserWriter 8 x driver see Using the Apple LaserWriter 8 x driver Using the printer s front panel Refer to Using the Front Panel for instructions on using the printer s front panel PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Print features quick reference Macintosh printer drivers Click on the following topics for individual print feature tables for each driver m Macintosh Driver Tektronix Phaser 600 m Macintosh Driver Adobe PSPrinter and Apple LaserWriter 8 x m Macintosh Driver for QuickDraw GX Tektronix Phaser 600 G
44. automated fax systems Refer to If you need help for information on using these systems Click on the following topics for more information about fonts Resident typefaces PostScript Printer s Extended Features option Downloading fonts Macintosh screen fonts Using fonts with Windows Printing font samplers Resident typefaces PostScript The printer accepts Adobe Type 1 and Type 3 downloadable fonts TrueType fonts and a variety of user defined fonts To extend font capability the printer provides an internal 1 Gbyte hard disk and supports a SCSI connected external hard disk for permanent storage of additional fonts Refer to Using SCSI Hard Disks or World Wide Web for more information The printer printer standard configuration is shipped with a set of 17 resident fonts Courier Courier Bold Courier Oblique Courier Bold Oblique Helvetica Helvetica Bold Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Oblique Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Times Roman Times Bold Times Italic Times Bold Italic Symbol 2 wu Bo A 9480 59 Printers Extended Features option If you have the printer s Extended Features option 22 additional fonts are included on the printers CD ROM Refer to Extended Features upgrade for more information The following fonts are optionally available with the Extended Features option ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
45. automated fax systems Refer to Using the automated fax systems for instructions on using HAL For font storage The Phaser 600 printer can use most SCSI hard disks that support the full SCSI command set Also most SCSI hard disks that work with an Apple LaserWriter will work with a Phaser 600 printer Contact your computer or printer dealer for information ORDERING INFORMATION Ordering information See SCSI hard disk for information on ordering a SCSI hard disk cables and terminators See Ordering Interface cables and adapters for information on ordering SCSI cables CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK Connecting a SCSI hard disk You can connect one or more SCSI external hard disks to the printer for additional font storage When you download a font to an external disk the font remains there until you remove it Click on the following topics for more information Required items Important guidelines Connecting one disk Connecting multiple disks CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK Required items To connect an external disk you need the following items A SCSI peripheral cable for each disk The printer uses a SCSI 2 50 pin connector See Ordering Interface cables and adapters if you need a 50 pin connector One SCSI cable terminator unless one of your disks has an internal terminator CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK Important guidelines When connecting a hard disk to the printer follow these gu
46. color conversions Using the rendering intents COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Turning off all color corrections If you do not want to use any TekColor color corrections you can specify no corrections from a supported driver or with utility files or from the printer s front panel Select None when you are doing the following m Using applications that do their own color adjusting m Using ColorSync on a Macintosh or host color correction in Windows 95 m Printing PANTONE Colors COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Printing the brightest colors and a truer blue The Vivid Color option makes printed blue appear less purple by reducing the amount of magenta used to print blue colors Other colors in the cyan blue purple magenta range in the image are also adjusted to compensate for the adjusted blue Colors in the red orange yellow green range are minimally affected This selection is good for applications that do not need to simulate a printing press It is also good for making presentation graphics such as backlit media or transparencies Vivid Color adjusts CMYK colors using a method that adds black to other components This option prints more saturated darker colors and may be useful for printing from some applications such as CorelDRAW Use this option if you have specified a color in the CMYK system and the color has a black component and the color appears lighter than you expected
47. disabling front panel menus Resetting the printer Enabling and disabling job pipelining Configuring a printer s serial port Formatting a SCSI hard disk Initializing a formatted SCSI hard disk Enabling and disabling SysStart Job execution Setting PostScript and HP GL job and wait timeouts Changing the printer s language mode Modifying the Advance Media default Setting page offset USING THE UTILITY FILES Cut Media Fusing Mode Media Fusing Mirror Print Page Rotation Image Smoothing Using the color rendering intents MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Mounting the PC DOS diskette on a workstation Click on the following topics for more information SGIIRIX versions 4 0 x and 5 m Sun running Solaris 2 3 E Sun running SunOS 4 1 3 MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION SGI IRIX versions 4 0 x and 5 PC DOS formatted diskettes can be easily mounted in the SGI environment For more information print out the appropriate man pages on your system IRIX version 4 0 x uses the msdosd daemon to mount a floppy diskette IRIX version 5 uses the mediad daemon to mount all types of devices including floppy diskettes Both operating system versions have the utilities from_dos and to_unix to convert files and add or remove Control M characters To mount a diskette insert the diskette into the disk drive msdosd The msdosd daemon monitors a floppy diskette drive When a diskette
48. found on a hard disk connected to the printer s SCSI port each time the printer is turned on or reset The SysStart job is similar to an Init file it executes automatically each time the printer is turned on Click on the following topics for more information EI Macintosh users m PC and workstation users m Front panel ENABLING AND DISABLING SYSSTART JOB EXECUTION Macintosh users Refer to Macintosh software for instructions on installing the printer s utility files Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu ENABLING AND DISABLING SYSSTART JOB EXECUTION Select one of the following files from the list then click Open These files were installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the Phaser Tools folder m Use the Set SysStart Job file to enable automatic execution of the Sysstart job m Use the No SysStart Job file to disable automatic execution of the Sysstart job At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type anew name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue If output is returned by the
49. from the File menu Drag a document onto a desktop printer icon The application corresponding to the document opens displays the Print dialog box and waits for you to click Print After printing the document the application quits PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Using the Printing menu Most of the commands in the Printing menu are standard QuickDraw GX driver commands and are documented by Apple see the Macintosh Guide on line document for details The last group of commands in this menu are printer specific PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Control printing Use the Start Print Queue and Stop Print Queue commands in the Printing menu to control the print queues on individual desktop printers 1 Select highlight a desktop printer icon 2 From the Printing menu select either Start Print Queue or Stop Print Queue PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Designating a default desktop printer Select highlight a desktop printer icon From the Printing menu select Set Default Printer A check mark appears next to the command and a bold outline appears around the desktop printer s icon PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Using printing extensions Use the Extension Setup command in the Printing menu to specify which third party printing extensions you want enabled for the currently selected desktop printer By default all printing extensions are enabled Select highlight a desktop printer icon Select Exte
50. from the Magnification field in the Status bar at the bottom of the window Words or phrases in this manual in blue underlined type are hypertext links click on the link to go immediately to information on that topic CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 1 GETTING SET UP 9 Features 2 Ataglance 10 Information roadmap 7 Setting up the printer 11 What you get with your printer 11 Registering your printer 14 Unpacking instructions 15 Moving the printer to its operating location 16 Removing adhesive tape and cable tie 17 Removing the transit restraint 18 Removing the shipping blocks 21 Attaching the ink loader 23 Loading the ink 24 Attaching the output bin 26 Attaching the Quick Reference Guide 27 Connecting the printer 28 Printer ports 28 Adjust the leveling legs and lock the wheels Turning on the printer 33 Selecting a language for the front panel 37 Installing the starter paper roll 39 Loading the paper roll 40 Feeding roll paper 43 Software installation 46 Overview for all PC and Macintosh platforms PC Windows software 48 PRINTING BASICS 80 Which Windows driver to install 49 Printing overview 81 Custom Install or Easy Install 50 Printing from aPC 82 Macintosh software 69 Print features quick reference Windows printer Which Macintosh driver to install 70 drivers 83 Custom Install or Easy Install 71 Using the Microsoft PostScript driver with Windows Workstation software 78 95 101 Using the AdobePS 4 driver with Windows 95 105 Using th
51. image left to right before printing m The default selection is off USING THE PLUG IN Center page a Check the box either on or off a On For roll media the page or image is centered on the media from side to side For cut sheet media the image is centered from side to side and from top to bottom Off Uses the default setting in the printer either None or a setting made with a PostScript utility file shipped on the printers CD ROM The default for this option is off USING THE PLUG IN No margins Check the box either on or off Check this box on to specify zero margins for the current page size Use this option with roll media The default is off USING THE PLUG IN Image smoothing Check the box either on or off The Image Smoothing option produces smooth color detail when printing bitmapped images This option is useful when bitmapped images are enlarged to print on large media This option improves some low resolution images by averaging between the pixels The default for this option is off USING THE PLUG IN Color control strip m Check this option either on or off to print a band of colors along the bottom edge of your prints The default is off he colors are the printer s 8 primary and secondary colors cyan magenta yellow black red magenta and yellow green cyan and yellow blue cyan and magenta and black cyan magenta and yellow The colors a
52. is inserted it is mounted appropriately if it is in MS DOS format To specify a floppy disk drive use the appropriate device special file in dev rdsk High density diskettes are mounted by using floppy devices with the hi suffix MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION mediad The mediad daemon monitors the removable media devices on a system Whena diskette is inserted it is mounted if it makes sense for that media type and if there is a valid file system on it MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Sun running Solaris 2 3 PC DOS formatted diskettes can be mounted in two ways in the Solaris environment either automatically or manually For more information print out the appropriate man pages on your system Click on the following topics for more information m Automatic diskette mounting instructions m Manual diskette mounting instructions MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Automatic diskette mounting instructions If the volume manager is running the PC DOS diskette will be mounted automatically when the diskette is inserted in the disk drive To see if the volume manager is running type the following command ps ef grep vold To see a list of the diskette s contents do the following steps Run Open Windows Open the File Manager Insert the PC DOS diskette Click on the File button in the File Manager window then click on Check for Floppy The File Manager displays t
53. is selected in the Print dialog box Some applications require special files to print in color Make sure that these files are properly installed For information refer to Printing from a Macintosh or through the Tektronix World Wide Web page Make sure that you have not selected Monochrome in the TekColor Options dialog box If you have a PC Be sure to use a driver that supports color PostScript If you are using Windows 3 1 use the Phaser 600 printer driver If you are using Windows make sure that the Color box in the Options dialog box is checked For information on the drivers refer to Printing from a PC or through the Tektronix World Wide Web page Make sure that you have not selected Monochrome in the Tektronix Printer Features dialog box If you are not using a driver make sure that you have not downloaded the monochrome mode selection code make sure that the front panel is not set for Monochrome PRINTING HINTS Printing hints Application hints For information about using specific software applications with your printer contact Tektronix HAL or EuroHAL information systems In the U S call 1 800 835 6100 or 503 682 7450 for EuroHAL telephone numbers refer to If you need help For a complete listing of available topics request a catalog Tektronix supplies and software Always use Tektronix supplies to ensure the highest quality prints and printer performance Tektronix Printer Description Files PPDs
54. language selection is enabled on a particular port it becomes the default on that port allowing you to send PostScript and HP GL files to that port Changes to the language on any port remain in effect even if the printer is turned off or reset CHANGING THE PRINTER S LANGUAGE MODE NOTE NE The following files affect printer operation If the printer is shared on a network using these files may affect the prints requested from other users Click on the following topics for more information m Printing PostScript files m Printing HP GL files Enabling automatic language selection CHANGING THE PRINTER S LANGUAGE MODE Printing PostScript files Use the PSCRIPT PS file to change a printer s port to accept only PostScript data After you copy this file to a port the printer expects PostScript files on that port The port s language change is persistent across print jobs and across printer power cycles To use send the PSCAIPT PS file to the printer 1 Locate the utility files on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM refer to Installing the files for instructions Use one of the following methods to send the PSCRIPT PS file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager m Workstation users Send the file to a printer as you would any PostScript file CHANGING THE PRINTER S LANGUAGE MODE P
55. minutes should give you enough time to reach the printer and load media ManualFeedTimeout To specify no timeout NOTE vV For timeout problems in Windows also increase the Windows WaitTimeOut to 999 See Fixing timeout problems in Windows for instructions SETTING POSTSCRIPT AND HP GL JOB AND WAIT TIMEOUTS 5 Use one of the following methods to send the CONFIG PS file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file CHANGING THE PRINTER S LANGUAGE MODE Changing the printer s language mode The Phaser 600 printer supports the following printer languages PostScript Level 1 and Level 2 m HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language In the factory default configuration the printer expects to receive PostScript data on all ports If you want to use an HP GL application you must explicitly set up a printer port to receive HP GL data or enable Adobe IntelliSelect automatic language selection Changing the language of the printer between PostScript and HP GL is port specific The ports such as parallel serial or Locallalk can each be configured differently You can change the default language on any port so whenever the printer is turned on it expects to receive PostScript or HP GL data on a specific port If automatic
56. modes Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Print Quality Driver for Windows NT 4 0 cont d Feature Description PRINTING FROM A PC Driver selection Color correction m None default a Vivid Color Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Custom Profile Color corrections Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Color Correction Fusing Mode m Cold m Hot m None Fusing Mode Media Fusing Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Fusing Mode Cut Media m Never m After each page m After each job Cut Media Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Cut Media Driver for Windows NT 4 0 cont d Feature Description PRINTING FROM A PC Driver selection Advance Media Advance Media m Never m After each page m After each job a Allow Hot Fusing Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Advance Media Print Preview Print Preview a On m Off Available only with the Extended Features option Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Print Preview Page Rotation Page Rotation O degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Page Rotation Driver for Windows NT 4 0 cont d Feature Description P
57. non supported driver 1 Print a color chart with either the Vivid Color front panel selection or the Vivid Color utility file downloaded to the printer Print from an application with either the Vivid Color front panel selection or the Vivid Color utility file downloaded to the printer PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH The following table lists the driver color correction selections with their corresponding utility files and front panel settings Which color correction to use If you plan to print Then print the chart with the corresponding color correction set colors from an either with a utility file downloaded to the printer or selected application with this from the printer s front panel color correction selected in a driver Driver Color Macintosh Printer s front panel selection Correction utility file name TekColor Corrections menu selection Simulate Display Simulate Display Display Vivid Color Vivid Color Vivid Color Use Printer Setting any color correction utility file any front panel color setting Commercial Press Commercial Press Commercial Euroscale Press Euroscale Press Euroscale SWOP Press SWOP Press SWOP SNAP Press SNAP Press SNAP None No Color Correction None Use the same color correction to print the chart and later to print the colors from an application PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Printing the color charts NOTE wy v If you are using QuickDraw GX you can print the color chart
58. of the image aligns with the media s short edge 9480 76 Landscape Top of the image aligns with media s long edge Rotated Landscape Top of the image aligns with media s long edge ALL ABOUT MEDIA Page Rotation The Page Rotation option selectable in the printer driver changes the way that the image is marked on the paper In this illustration the arrow indicates the feed direction and leading edge Portrait orientation P 9480 77 Landscape orientation 9480 100 ALL ABOUT MEDIA Hints Using 90 or 270 rotation with smaller page sizes on larger roll media uses less media For instance an ANSI B 11 x 17 in image uses 6 inches less media when it is rotated 90 or 270 Cut sheet media can be fed with the long edge first with rotation set to 90 or 270 however do not use Page Centering or much of your image will not print ALL ABOUT MEDIA Manual Feed using cut sheet media You can select Manual Feed in the printer driver You can also feed the cut sheet media as it is needed without selecting Manual Feed in the driver Unload any roll media by lifting the latch on the top cover Open the paper roll cover to rewind the media completely onto the roll NOTE sy v If the printer senses that roll media is installed it looks to see if any media is covering a sensor located
59. on the following rendering intents Absolute Colorimetric Relative Colorimetric Saturation Perceptual Use Printer Setting Uses the printer s default setting TE wy v Calibrated RGB and Lab modes take longer to print than other modes because the printer must convert CIE colors to RGB or CMYK colors for printing USING THE PLUG IN Compress image data Check the box either on or off Use this option to compress image data so less data needs to be sent to the printer This option is useful if your network connection is slow for example if you are connected to a very busy network or if you are using LocalTalk or a parallel port For fast networks printing may be faster without using this option The default for this option is on USING THE PLUG IN Fast preview Check the box either on or off This option produces a quick print of your image with slightly reduced image quality This option reflects the color correction you selected for printing your image For the fastest printing use the None color correction option The default for this option is off USING THE PLUG IN Manual feed Check the box either on or off Check this box on when you are using manually fed media This option uses the current settings for Media size Landscape orientation and Quality The default is off This option must be reselected each time you want to print on manually fed media USING THE PLUG IN
60. or diskettes Refer to Downloading files to the printer for instructions on downloading utility files SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Page Centering This feature available only in supported printer drivers centers the requested page size on the actual page size of the media For roll media the image is centered from side to side For cut sheet media the image is centered from side to side and from top to bottom Options m Off m On default Hints When you select Page Centering make sure that media is already loaded before sending a job to the printer If media is not loaded the printer uses the default media size the front panel setting to calculate the center position Depending on the default setting and the requested size the image can be clipped or missing SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Page Rotation The Page Rotation option selectable in supported printer drivers changes the way that the image is marked on the paper Options ral 0 None default E 90 180 2 0 E 270 9480 77 In this illustration the arrow indicates the leading edge of the media the leading edge is the side of the media that enters the printer first SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Hints Rotating an image 90 or 270 is useful for printing a small image on large media for example a Tabloid size image on a 36 inch 914 mm media roll Rotating an image 180 changes the top and bottom ma
61. printer s fonts TE wy v If you select Tektronix Phaser 600 with Extended Features and you have only the standard printer configuration with 17 fonts any of the additional fonts selected within an application are printed in the Courier typeface FONTS PRINTING INCORRECTLY FROM WINDOWS Getting printer configuration information If you are not sure which printer configuration you have press and hold down the o button on the printer s front panel for configuration and amount of memory Printer information appears on the lower line of the display m For standard configuration 17 fonts the display reads Config Standard 8 24 40MB m For the Extended Features configuration 39 fonts the display reads Config Extended 8 24 40MB You can also print a copy of the printer s startup page Refer to Printing the startup page for instructions Refer to PC Windows software for complete instructions on installing the printer and drivers SHARING THE PRINTER ON A NETWORK Sharing the printer on a network Driver utility files and front panel interactions If your Phaser 600 printer is shared by other users on a network you can affect prints made by other users when you use the downloadable utility files or the printer s front panel to change the printer s default color correction setting m When you print from a supported driver with any TekColor color correction selection except Use Printer Setting the driver selectio
62. specifies colors as CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black This file lets you control the CMYK output of the printer s colors without using any TekColor color corrections Raw RGB Colors RAWRGB PS Converts all colors CMY CMYK grays to RGB colors Use this file if your application specifies colors as RGB red green and blue This file lets you control the CMY output of the printer s colors without using any TekColor color corrections TE sy v Refer to Using Printer Utilities for instructions on installing and using the utility files COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Using the rendering intents The color rendering intents are designed for use with images containing colors specified in the PostScript Level 2 international color standard CIE XYZ which was developed by the Commission Internationale de l Eclairage International Commission on Illumination Each color rendering intent provides a specific type of color matching Rendering Intent Absolute Rendering Intent Relative Rendering Intent Saturation Rendering Intent Perceptual See Using the color rendering intents for details COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Special considerations Click on the following topics for more information f your Phaser 600 printer is shared on a network m Application color corrections lf you are using an unsupported driver COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELE
63. stops printing if ink is not loaded soon Open the cover of the ink loader and load ink sticks of that color FRONT PANEL MESSAGES Front panel messages cont d Message Action Initializing Clear Fuser Jam Clear Exit Jam Clear Entrance Jam Clear Internal Jam Clear Ink Loader Jam Receiving Processing Wake Up Warming Up XX min No user action required Wait for a period of time up to approximately 10 minutes 1 Cut the media if roll media is loaded 2 Open the top cover and use a pen to move the printhead to the right side 3 Open the exit cover and move the fuser to one side 4 Remove the jammed media Refer to Clearing a media jam for detailed instructions Open the ink loader cover and remove the jammed ink stick s No user action required No user action required Press any front panel button or send a print job to bring the printer to Ready after warming up No user action required The printer will be ready in the specified amount of time more if cleaning cycle is required SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Symptoms and solutions Diagnostic tools The Phaser 600 printer provides several tools for diagnosing and solving various types of problems these tools include the following m Troubleshooting quick reference table describes printing problems by symptom then lists the possible causes and solutions Phaser 600 Color Printer Quick Reference Guide provides ea
64. the File Manager m Workstation users Send the file to a printer as you would any PostScript file TESTING PRINTER LANGUAGE MODE CHANGES Testing printer language mode changes Click on the following topics for more information m Testing HP GL mode m Testing PostScript mode TESTING PRINTER LANGUAGE MODE CHANGES Testing HP GL mode HPGLTEST PLT is an HP GL file that prints a single line of text if the printer is operating in HP GL mode Send the HPGLTEST PLT file to the printer after you send the HPGL PS or AIS PS file to make sure the language change was made correctly 1 Locate the utility files on the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM refer to Installing the files for instructions Use one of the following methods to send the HPGLTEST PLT file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any utility file TESTING PRINTER LANGUAGE MODE CHANGES Testing PostScript mode PSTEST PS is a PostScript file that prints a single line of text if the printer is operating in PostScript mode Send the PSTEST PS file to the printer after you send the PSCRIPT PS or AIS PS file to make sure the language change was made correctly 1 Locate the utility files on the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM refer to Installing the files for instructions Use on
65. the LaserWriter 8 driver icon 4 MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Setting up the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver cont d 4 Click on the Zone your printer is in See your network administrator if you have questions Select your printer from the list Still in the Chooser click the Setup button to see a list of options The correct PPD file is automatically selected If it is not click on the PPD for your printer then click Select TKPH6001 PPD Standard configuration a TKP600P1 PPD Extended Features option Note Press and hold down the printer s button on the front panel for configuration information 8 Select the appropriate items under Installable Options then click OK 9 Close the Chooser WORKSTATION SOFTWARE Workstation software Downloadable printer utility files Note Refer to Printing from UNIX and VMS Workstations for more information on printing from a workstation These utility files on the printers CD ROM and diskettes can be used with UNIX and VMS workstations they let you set up your spooling system to select the following Print quality mode Color correction mode Media size Other printer features UNIX workstation users can access utility files in any of the following ways If your system includes a CD ROM drive install the files from the printer s CD ROM Look in the bin direction for workstation specific files Mount the printer s diskette and copy the files Access the T
66. the current values The possible values for each parameter are listed in the Parameter values table the values are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown in the table Save the file The printer s port you are using should be configured to receive PostScript If you have questions see Using Different Printer Language Modes for more information Use one of the following methods to send the file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file CONFIGURING A PRINTER S SERIAL PORT Parameter values Parameter key Allowed Type Parameter key Allowed Type values values FlowControl XonXoff string CheckParity true boolean software false Dtr hardware Parity Even string On true boolean Odd false None Space DataBits integer Interpreter PostScript string StopBits integer Protocol Normal string Raw Binary Baud integer Enabled true boolean false OTHER UTILITIES Other utilities There are other printer utility files available on the printers CD ROM and diskettes that are not described in this section Refer to the following table for information on other printer features with their accompanying utility file names then use the instructions in Downloading files to the printer to download the
67. the floor is a carpeted surface the casters alone keep the printer steady CONNECTING THE PRINTER Turning on the printer CAUTION Before turning on the power to the printer make sure that you have removed all shipping material from inside the printer otherwise you can damage the printer See Removing the transit restraint Removing the shipping blocks and Removing adhesive tape and cable tie L Transit restraint printhead inside the printer s top cover Il Cable ties inside the printer s top cover l Shipping blocks fuser inside the exit cover Make sure that you have attached the ink loader to the printer and that its cover is closed otherwise the printer will not start up UTION To protect your printer from a power surge make sure that the power switch on the printer is in the off position before plugging in the cord You can also use a surge protector that is designed for computer equipment Make sure that you use the power cord that is shipped with the printer If you need a new power cord contact your local Tektronix dealer Plug the power cord into the printer and into a grounded outlet Turn on the power to any peripherals you have connected i e an external SCSI disk or the Phaser Copystation Wait 1 minute then turn on the printer CONNECTING THE PRINTER 9480 140 CONNECTING THE PRINTER What happens at power up m Both status indicators power and error on the pr
68. the printer s wide format design use cut sheet media at least B size and or roll media at least 16 5 inches wide for better feed reliability Make sure that the leading edge of the media roll is cut evenly corners are 90 and smoothly Refer to the illustration below If your media is not cut evenly follow the instructions on Cutting roll media 9480 96 Media does not Clean the Drum Feed rollers and paper guides and Clamp rollers advance SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Media problems cont d Symptom Solution Media wrinkling Check media thickness media that is too thin will wrinkle Reduce the image so that ink placement and fusing complete at least 25 mm 1 inch from the trailing edge of the media 4 9480 82 SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Problems with image size and position Symptom Solution Cut off images Check your application for image sizing Make sure that you are using a printer PPD file and have selected the correct page size If you select the incorrect page size the image may be cut off Make sure that the media selected in the driver is the same as or smaller than the media installed If you selected Page Centering in the driver make sure that media is loaded before you send the print job otherwise the default media setting calculates the centering position Image shifts or margins are incorrect Macintosh Make sure that you have installed the p
69. under the paper roll cover it may not print the correct image area Close the paper roll cover Lower the top cover latch Orient the media so that the print side is facing up To avoid fingerprints and smears hold the media by its outer edges and feed it over the top of the closed paper roll cover Align the media s right hand edge with the guide line on the printer Insert the media until it stops plus a little more to make it buckle slightly This ensures an even pressure and reduces the chance of media skewing The printer picks the media in approximately one second ALL ABOUT MEDIA 9480 141 ALL ABOUT MEDIA The front panel displays this message after it has processed a job o G Eel NOTE sy 9 9480 12 CD 4 v On a network where the printer is usually using roll media select Manual Feed in the driver wait for the front panel to display this message then unload the roll media and load the cut sheet If cut sheet media is usual or if the printer is connected to a single computer you can load the cut sheet media at any time after the roll media is unloaded Press the front panel s Continue button the printhead begins printing Wait until the printer ejects the first sheet before inserting another sheet IMAGE MANIPULATION Image manipulation This printer provides several special options for image manipulation Some of these options are selected in the drive
70. use the Copy command in the File Manager ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT PANEL MENUS Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file Tektronix W4 ORDERING INFORMATION Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer TEKTRONIX PRINTER AND TEKTRONIX SUPPLIES MADE FOR EACH OTHER Tektronix Printer and Tektronix Supplies Made For Each Other Tektronix supplies are developed and tested as a total system printer ink and media These system components work together to produce consistent high quality color images Always order Tektronix supplies for your printer printer to guarantee the best print quality media feed reliability and trouble free printer performance CAUTION To avoid damaging the printhead use only Tektronix Phaser 600 ColorStix ink sticks in your printer TEKTRONIX PRINTER AND TEKTRONIX SUPPLIES MADE FOR EACH OTHER Customizing your printer Tektronix offers upgrade and accessory kits to expand your printer s capabilities To order upgrade kits refer to the information provided in this chapter or the supplies information sheet that was shipped with the printer and contact your local dealer or Tektronix office In the United States call Tektronix at 1 800 835 6100 ORDERING PRINTER SUPPLIES Ordering printer supplies For a complete list of printer supplies refer to the supplies information sheet that was shipped with the printer and contact your
71. using the Printer Driver Defaults command in the Printing menu You can also change the default desktop printer before you change printing selections To change the default desktop printer see Designating a default desktop printer PRINTING FROM NON QUICKDRAW GX APPLICATIONS Changing a desktop printer s default selections 1 Click to highlight the default desktop printer 2 From the Printing menu select Printer Driver Defaults 3 Make desired printer selections then click OK and return to your application VIEWING PRINTER STATUS Viewing printer status Once you send a print job to a desktop printer you can monitor the status of the print job in the Printer Status dialog box There are two ways to open the Printer Status dialog box m Select highlight the appropriate desktop printer icon then select Open from the File menu m Double click the appropriate desktop printer icon DISABLING QUICKDRAW GX Disabling QuickDraw GX You may want to disable QuickDraw GX when printing from some non QuickDraw GX applications so you can use a driver such as the LaserWriter 8 x driver There are two ways to disable QuickDraw GX Method 1 1 Open the Extensions folder inside the System Folder 2 Drag the QuickDraw GX extension onto the desktop 3 Select Restart from the Special menu Any desktop printers created before you disabled QuickDraw GX will have an X drawn through their icons These desktop print
72. when printed COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Simulating display screen colors The Simulate Display option makes printed colors closer to the colors on a standard display screen This selection should improve the screen to printer color accuracy for most applications that don t perform their own color corrections This selection is best for applications that define colors as RGB red green blue HLS hue lightness saturation or HSB hue saturation brightness COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Closely match printing press colors There are several printing press color correction options Each press option conforms to a different printing standard Use a press option if you are previewing work for a four color job to be printed on a printing press These options simulate a four color commercial printing press not solid spot colors such as PANTONE Colors You can use PhaserMatch to tailor a built in press color correction for a particular press NOTE sy v If you are selecting PANTONE Colors in your application use the None option see Turning off all color corrections for details Also use the None option with other color management systems such as EfiColor Click on the following topics for more information SWOP Press Commercial Press Euroscale Press SNAP Press Custom Profiles COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION SWOP Press Press option Inks Bas
73. widths are set to 0 35 millimeters Pen O is white this is the background pen color pen 1 is black pen 2 is red pen 3 is green pen 4 is blue pen 5 is cyan pen 6 is magenta and pen 7 is yellow CTRL D HP7475A lt lt Password ColorSetup 0 O O 0 O 0 O 0 O o o et ol oooo0oo0oo0oo00 Hoot eo oe fF oooo0oo0oo0oo00 oP o o oe BP oooo0oo0oo0oo00 gt gt setdevparams SETTING DEFAULT HP GL PEN COLORS Allowable values for pen numbers are 0 through 255 Pen width is measured in millimeters Red green and blue values can be any number between 0 0 and 1 0 The following table shows the red green and blue combinations for each of the eight basic colors Pen color Green Blue number Color value value O white 1 0 1 0 1 black 0 0 0 0 red l 0 0 0 0 green i 1 0 0 0 blue 0 0 1 0 cyan i 1 0 1 0 magenta l 0 0 1 0 yellow 1 0 0 0 SETTING DEFAULT HP GL PEN COLORS To add a new pen you must redefine pens 0 through 7 first then add the new pens you want To set pen widths and colors to values other than those in the HPGLPENS PS file follow these steps 1 Configure the printer s port to receive PostScript see Printing PostScript files for instructions Locate the utility files on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM refer to Installing the files for instructions Copy the HPGLPENS PS file to your hard disk and open the file in a text editor SETTING DEFAULT HP GL PEN COLORS Ed
74. you want to use From the File menu select the Open command In the dialog box that appears locate the directory and file location of the TEK_600 Al file and open the file When you are working on an image use the Paint menu and either the Paint Style or Custom Color commands to select PANTONE Colors USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Aldus PageMaker 5 0 PC The TEK_600 ACF file is used by the application to properly specify PANTONE Colors for the Phaser 600 printer See Installing the PC files if you haven t already installed the files Place the TEK_600 ACF file in the USENGLSH COLOA directory in the A dus application directory Start PageMaker Choose Element Define Colors New Libraries then select the Phaser 600 Pantone Library USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES CorelDRAW PC The TEK_600 PAL file is used by the CorelDRAW application to properly specify PANTONE Colors for a Phaser 600 printer This file is application specific and printer specific See Installing the PC files if you haven t already installed the files Place the TEK_600 PAL file in the Corel application s directory Open CorelDRAW Open the document you want to work in Select the item you want filled with a PANTONE Color then select the Fill tool icon paint bucket Select the Fill tool icon again then select the Open button under Palette In the dialog box under Path specify the location of the TEK_600 FAL file
75. 2 automatic scaling _246 custom scaling _246 media size interactions 248 SCSI ID 29 CorelDRAW PANTONE color library file PC 300 correcting printed colors _197 CTRLD PS PC utility file 471 Custom Install option 47 custom page sizes 241 custom profiles 49 70 custom scaling Copystation 246 Cut Media Macintosh utility files 478 CUTJOB PS PC utility file 478 CUTNEVER PS PC utility file 478 CUTNOW PS PC utility file 478 A BCD EF GH cut off images 615 CUTPAGE PS PC utility file 478 cutter blade ordering _730 replacing 558 cutting roll media 43 D declaration of conformity _748 desktop printers QuickDraw GX printing from 141 372 selecting unique features for 371 DEVPARAM PS PC utility file 473 diagnosing print quality 596 disable timeouts 396 diskettes drivers and utilities 10 mounting instructions 414 display colors simulating _204 Macintosh 277 Windows 95 282 DOS COPY command using 441 MODE command using _396 printing from _393 downloading files from servers Tektronix ftp server 430 World Wide Web 429 IJK LMNOPQRSTUV W X Y Z downloading files to the printer DOS 441 LaserWriter Utility 434 Macintosh _434 PC 438 QuickDraw GX driver 381 437 Windows 3 1 439 Windows 95 440 downloading fonts _185 drivers installing DOS 400 Macintosh 69 Windows 48 using DOS 400 Macintosh _139 QuickDraw GX 371 Windows 3 1 115 Windows 95 101 105 Windows NT 4 0 119 drum cleaning 544 E Easy Install opti
76. 20 230 VAC equipment FCC Class B device for 100 120 VAC equipment Material Safety Data Sheets Specifications Copyrights Trademarks Phaser 600 Warranty Users safety summary CANADIAN EMC ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY REGULATORY STANDARDS Canadian EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility regulatory standards This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n emet pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limits applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe B prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le ministere des Communications du Canada DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR 220 230 VAC EQUIPMENT Declaration of conformity for 220 230 VAC equipment Tektronix Inc Color Printing and Imaging Division P O Box 1000 Wilsonville Oregon 97070 1000 U S A declares under our sole responsibility that the product printer Z600 to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standard s or other normative document s For the EN55022 1986 For the EN61000 3 2 For the EN61000 3 3 For the EN50082 1 1982 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR 220 230 VAC EQUIPMENT Limits and Methods of measurement of radio Interference characteristics of Information Technology Equipment
77. 36 pin high density printer to 25 pin DSUB PC cable from Tektronix order number 012 1468 00 Otherwise you can use a 36 pin to 36 pin parallel cable and the parallel adapter supplied with the printer Connect a parallel interface cable to your computer and to the printer s parallel port 9480 58 CONNECTING THE PRINTER PhaserShare card optional The printer accepts one of the following m PhaserShare Ethernet card supporting Novell NetWare EtherTalk TCP IP Telnet and FTP protocols PhaserShare Token Ring card supporting Novell NetWare TCP IP TokenTalk Telnet and FTP protocols PhaserShare LocalTalk serial card The PhaserShare Network Cards and Software System Administrator Manual contains all the information necessary for configuring and using the optional network interfaces Refer to PhaserShare network cards for ordering information CONNECTING THE PRINTER Adjust the leveling legs and lock the wheels It is very important that the printer be set up on a level secure surface for the best print quality 1 Remove the adhesive tape that protects the leveling legs and the bottom of the printer To adjust the four leveling legs under 9480 128 the printer use a small adjustable wrench to turn the nut on each leg to the desired height If the floor is a smooth non carpeted surface the leveling legs keep the printer from sliding Lock the front casters by pressing down on the locking lever If
78. 498 99 Make sure that you have access to all sides of the printer while you are setting it up Allow 30 cm 12 in from the wall to accommodate the ink loader UTION To reduce the possibility of damage to the ink loader position the rear of the printer against a wall rather than an aisleway SETTING UP THE PRINTER Removing adhesive tape and cable tie Remove the adhesive tape from the top cover Remove the styrofoam block from the top cover latch Cut and remove the cable tie from the exit cover latch 9480 03 SETTING UP THE PRINTER Removing the transit restraint CAUTION The transit restraint must be removed before turning on the power otherwise you will damage the printhead To open the top cover lift the latch and then lift the cover to an upright position The yellow transit restraint attached to the red warning ribbon protects the printhead during shipment It is visible inside on the far right of the printer SETTING UP THE PRINTER Using your left hand grasp the transit restraint as shown Use your index finger to lift the end of the restraint over the metal plate Rotate the restraint toward you to release it from the printer Save the restraint for future use 9480 04 CD SETTING UP THE PRINTER Cut and remove the three cable ties that secure the rollers Close the top cover making sure that the latch is pressed down 9480 121
79. 735 LocalTalk support _735 serial support 735 Use Printer Setting color correction description 212 used ink 569 using color 195 200 using EuroHAL 582 using Macintosh drivers Adobe PSPrinter _139 Apple LaserWriter 8 x 140 Phaser 600 driver 138 QuickDraw GX 141 using Windows 3 1 drivers Adobe PostScript 115 Tektronix driver 109 using Windows 95 drivers AdobePS 4 105 MS PostScript 101 RS TU V WX Y Z using Windows NT drivers Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 118 Windows NT 4 0 119 utilities diskettes 10 utility files Macintosh installing _427 using 434 PE installing _428 using 438 workstation downloading _78 V Vivid Color color correction selecting from the front panel 152 selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 VMS workstations 147 A BCD EF GH W wait timeout 517 warm up printer mode 35 waste bin 569 wheels casters about 16 locking 32 wide format printing 2 WIN INI file editing 189 Windows 3 1 driver configuring _109 Features tab 115 fonts 189 Job Controltab 116 Paper tab 115 PostScript Header 116 PostScript tab 116 problems with printer fonts 653 problems with setting page sizes 650 timeouts 111 639 using 115 using fonts _189 Windows 3 1 software installing 51 setting up 56 JK LM NO PQR S TU VW X Y Z Windows 95 driver Details tab _101 105 Device Options tab 103 106 0 Graphics tab 102 106 Papertab 102 106 PostScript He
80. 88 All trademarks noted herein are either the property of Tektronix Inc Pantone Inc or their respective companies PHASER 600 WARRANTY Phaser 600 Warranty ONE YEAR ON SITE WARRANTY IS STANDARD WITH OPTIONAL PLANS FOR EXTENDED SERVICE USERS SAFETY SUMMARY Users safety summary Terms in manual m CAUTION Conditions that can result in damage to the product m WARNING Conditions that can result in personal injury or loss of life Power source Do not apply more than 250 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground Use only the specified power cord and connector Refer to a qualified service technician for changes to the cord or connector Operation of product Avoid electric shock by contacting a qualified service technician to replace fuses inside the product Do not operate without the covers and panels properly installed Do not operate in an atmosphere of explosive gases Safety instructions Read all installation instructions carefully before you plug the product into a power source USERS SAFETY SUMMARY Terms on product m CAUTION A personal injury hazard exists that may not be apparent For example a panel may cover the hazardous area Also applies to a hazard to property including the product itself DANGER A personal injury hazard exists in the area where you see the sign Care of product Disconnect the power plug by pulling the plug
81. ATENO PS 478 SCREENON PS 649 SCRENOFF PS 649 SMOOTHON PS 478 JK LMNOPQRSTUV WX Y Z SMOTHOFF PS 478 STANDARD PS _477 SYSTART PS 503 TEKEHAND PS 635 UNIDIR PS 508 PC NFS 605 PC Windows software 48 Pen colors HP GL 530 peripheral devices 29 turning on the power 34 Phaser 600 driver setting up 73 using _138 Phaser 600 GX driver setting up 75 using 141 Phaser 600 Quick Reference Guide 596 731 Phaser Copystation 13 order number _741 using with a Phaser 600 242 PhaserLink software 5 151 PhaserMatch installing Macintosh _70 Windows 49 PhaserPrint for UNIX _742 for workstations 144 629 order number _742 software for workstations 405 PhaserPrint Photoshop plug in _71 319 installing for Macintosh 322 installing for Windows 323 selecting options 328 starting the plug in _326 PhaserShare cards 31 advantages of networking _740 configuring 31 manuals 731 order numbers _740 PhaserSym capabilities 743 order number _743 software for workstations _144 407 Photoshop Macintosh plug in 319 Windows plug in _319 PIPE_OFF PS PC utility file 460 PIPE_ON PS PC utility file 460 Pipelining Off Macintosh utility file 460 Pipelining On Macintosh utility file 460 pipelining print jobs 460 Plug in Adobe Photoshop using 319 portrait orientation 173 ports computer 396 setting up PC ports for DOS 395 ports printer parallel 30 PhaserShare 31 speed 621 ports see communication ports ABCDEFG PostScript d
82. AdobePS 3 PostScript Driver cont d Feature Description Driver selection Image Smoothing a On m Off Image Smoothing Features tab Image Smoothing Color Control Strip a On a Off Color Control Strip Features tab m Color Control Strip Mirror Print a On m Off Mirror Print Features tab Mirror Print PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 3 1 Tektronix PostScript Driver Feature Description Driver selection Media size m ANSI A B C D E m ISO A4 A3 A2 A1 AO m JIS B1 B2 B3 B4 a Arch A B C D E m 30 x 42 in Custom sizes Selecting media by size Printers Setup Paper Size Media source m Manual Feed m Roll Feed Selecting media_ by size Printers Setup Paper Source Print quality modes Standard m Enhanced Print quality modes Options Printer Features Print Quality Driver for Windows 3 1 Feature PRINTING FROM A PC Tektronix PostScript Driver cont d Description Driver selection Color correction m None default a Vivid Color Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Custom Profile Color corrections Options Printer Features m Color Correction Fusing Mode m Cold m Hot m None Fusing Mode Options Media Fusing Printer Features Fusing Mode Cut Media m Never m After each page
83. CTION If your Phaser 600 printer is shared on a network Another user may use the downloadable color correction utility files or the printer s front panel to change the printer s default color correction setting If this situation occurs the prints you make through a non supported driver may not print as expected Refer to Sharing the printer on a network for details on how the color corrections interact with the driver settings for either supported or non supported drivers COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Application color corrections Some applications perform color corrections to improve screen to printer color matching The TekColor color correction options in the supported drivers adjust colors in the printer after the application has performed its color corrections m lf the application uses CIE Commission Internationale de Eclairage colors the TekColor corrections will not be applied If you select a TekColor color correction option in a driver other than None the selection may override some application features If you try one of the TekColor color correction options in a supported driver and the printed results are not what you expected then select the None option and try reprinting your image Select the None TekColor color correction option in a supported driver if you are using ColorSync color matching on a Macintosh or host color correction in Windows 95 refer to Color Matching or Tektroni
84. DEMO directory If you would like to purchase a licensed version of the PhaserPrint for UNIX software contact your dealer local Tektronix office or in the United States call 1 800 835 6100 and order part number 4690F20 PRINTING FROM VMS WORKSTATIONS Printing from VMS workstations For printing from VMS workstations the optional PhaserSym utility functions as a driver for selecting printing options and as a queue manager PhaserSym software is compatible with DEC workstations running VAX VMS version 5 0 and later PhaserSym software communicates over the printer s optional TCP IP Ethernet interface and is required for proper communication with the printer The optional EasyCopy X software provides fast raster image printing to Tektronix printers If you would like to purchase a copy of PhaserSym software contact your dealer local Tektronix office or in the United States call 1 800 835 6100 and order part number4690F41 USING THE PRINTER S SOFTWARE Using the printer s software For some printer features you can use the downloadable utility files available on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM Use the utility files to set up Spool queues with printer features such as print quality and color corrections The utility files can also perform such tasks as changing the printer s name resetting the printer and using an error handler refer to Using the utility files for details The utility files are written in th
85. Enhanced Quality 477 Font Sampler 190 Format Printer Disk 495 Fusing 478 HSB Sampler _256 Image Smoothing Off 478 Image Smoothing On 478 Initialize Printer Disk 498 installing 427 Menu Long 722 Menu Short _722 Mirror Print Off 478 A BCD EF GH Mirror Print On 478 No Sys Start Job 501 Page Offset XY 468 Page Rotation 478 Pipelining Off 460 Pipelining On 460 Print Start Page _709 Raw CMYK Colors 213 Raw RGB Colors 213 Rendering Intents 458 Reset Printer 447 RGB Sampler _256 Set Sys Start Job 501 Setscreen Off 647 Setscreen On 647 Standard Quality 477 Tek Error Handler 635 maintaining print quality 537 596 Manual Feed 176 manuals ordering _731 margins cut sheets 159 media rolls 160 Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS _752 media all about 157 clearing jams 611 612 670 handling 658 hints and tips 658 JK LMNOPQRSTUV WX Y Z jams clearing 599 moving the fuser 674 moving the printhead 673 loading cut sheet media 176 paper 39 roll media _39 658 roll removing 542 skewing 613 stiffness 172 thickness 171 types 2 Media Cutting _226 Media Fusing 222 memory advantages of upgrading _738 order numbers _738 Menu Long Macintosh utility file 722 menu map 691 printing 696 Menu Short Macintosh utility file 722 MENULONG PS PC utility file 724 MENUSHRT PS PC utility file 724 Microsoft PostScript driver setting up 54 MIROROFF PS PC utility file 478 Mirror Print 228 Mirror Print Off Macintosh utility files 478
86. FEATURES Print features quick reference front panel cont d Feature descriptions Feature Front Panel See Fusing Mode Media Fusing Media Fusing Cold a Hot m None Media Defaults Menu Media Fuse Menu See Cut Media Media Cutting m Per page m Per job a Off Media Defaults Menu Media Cut Menu Reprint m Scale Copies Reprint Pause Menu Reprint See Image Smoothing Image Smoothing a On a Off Printer Defaults Menu Image Smoothing Menu PS Error Handler See Using a PostScript error handler Printer Defaults Menu PS Error Handler Menu Factory default setting Available only with the Extended Features option SELECTING PRINT FEATURES Print quality modes Using the front panel the printer drivers provided with your printer or PhaserLink software you can select from these print quality modes Standard The default print quality setting for full color full coverage printing on paper produces the fastest full color printing on paper printing time is 12 minutes per page for ANSI E size 34 x 44 in and its Metric equivalent Enhanced Printing time is 24 minutes per page for ANSI E size 34 x 44 in and its Metric equivalent in full color full coverage provides smoother images with less banding Color corrections SELECTING PRINT FEATURES The printer provides TekColor Dynamic Correction software which consi
87. INT SPEED Windows 95 users Click the Start icon in the taskbar on your screen a menu appears Move the cursor over Settings another menu appears In the menu click Printers the Printers window appears In the Printers window select the Phaser 600 printer icon then select Properties from the File menu Click the PostScript tab then click the Advanced button Select Use PostScript Level 2 features Click OK when finished Try printing the document again IMPROVING PRINT SPEED UNIX workstation users Workstation users can use the PhaserPrint software for UNIX to increase printer performance when printing bitmapped images Refer to Printing from UNIX workstations for details POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS PostScript printing errors NOTE sy v For information on specific applications request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL the Tektronix automated fax systems Refer to If you need help for instructions on using these systems If your printer reports a PostScript error when printing from Adobe PageMaker Adobe FreeHand QuarkXPress or Canvas you may be using an older or incorrect version of the printer description file Refer to Software installation for instructions on installing printer description files POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS You should always use the most current printer description file To determine the date of the file you are using do the following m Macintosh users Select highligh
88. IP stack is installed and running After you select this option you can choose a printer from the Printer model pop up menu You can add printers to the list delete printers from the list as well as edit a printer s configuration This is the fastest printing method and almost always prints your jobs in much less time than the Parallel Port or Printer Driver methods This is the recommended method if it is available for the printer you are using Parallel Port This option is available if you have any parallel printers installed in your PC After you select this option you can choose the desired printer port from the Port Name pop up menu USING THE PLUG IN Printer Driver This option prints the image to the selected printer After you select this option you can choose a printer from the Driver name pop up menu When you print from the main Photoshop window the PhaserPrint plug in prints the image on this printer PostScript file This option lets you save an image to disk as a PostScript Level 2 file When you click the Save button another dialog box appears allowing you to choose a new or existing file for saving the PostScript code When you select this option the File format pop up menu becomes available This pop up menu has two options ASCII base 85 and Binary ASCII base 85 If you choose this option the image data is encoded using an ASCII 85 filter during file output making the resulting PostScript file portable
89. ND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution Printer not operating cont d Verify that your printer can communicate If you have a PC Type this DOS command echo gt port echo showpage Ctrl D gt port Where CTRL D indicates pressing the D key while holding down the CTRL key Substitute the name of the printer port for example COM1 COM2 LPT1 LPT2 for the variable portin this command For example if you are testing a parallel connection on LPT1 type echo gt Iptt echo showpage Ctrl D gt I ptt If the communication link between your computer and the printer is working the printer ejects a blank page if media was previously loaded If this occurs but you cannot print from your application or through Windows make sure that the appropriate driver is installed and that you have selected the printer correctly Power indicator blinks and stops but the file does not print This is probably the result of a PostScript error Enable the PostScript error handler in the printer s front panel See Using a PostScript error handler for more information If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Printer not General things to try printing even though you ve configured a supported driver for your printer Print a different file Print from a different application Use a different driver Print from a di
90. OMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution Print job does not finish the printer times out If you are using the serial or parallel port from a PC make sure that you used the MODE command to set the PC s communication parameters For example MODE LPT1 P gt NUL MODE COM1 9600 N 8 1 P The P parameter in these commands sets the port timeout to Infinite Retry and must be part of the command If you are using Windows 3 1 or Windows 95 make sure that the Transmission Retry value for the printer s assigned port is set to 950 For more information see Printing from a PC then select your driver Error indicator is blinking The Error indicator blinks with any hard error such as media jam or door open Look at the front panel for an indication of the type of error then correct the problem If the front panel message Is service Required Fault Code xx Make note of the fault code number then turn the printer off and on again If the Error indicator remains on after power up your printer requires service See lf you need help for telephone information SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Media problems Symptom Solution Frequent media Make sure that the fixed end of the paper roll holder the side without the jams removable plastic nut is installed at the side closest to the front panel Make sure that the media is installed so that it loads over the top of the roll as sh
91. P Connection 4 For Name or address of host providing Ipd type your printer s IP address or Host name if Known to the network Note The printer s IP address may be available on the printer s configuration page If not ask your network administrator 5 For Name of printer on that machine type in one of the following PS for PostScript AUTO for automatic selection use capital letters 6 Click OK to complete the installation AppleTalk Connection 4 4 Double click on the appropriate zone if there are multiple AppleTalk zones Select your Tektronix printer and click OK At the prompt Do you want to capture this AppleTalk Printing Device click No Note Clicking Yes hides the printer from regular Macintosh users forcing them to use NT Server as a spooler as long as NT Server allows sharing of this printer 6 Click OK to complete the installation PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 4 0 The Windows NT driver does not support the PhaserMatch application Refer to Which Windows driver to install for information on drivers that do You must have your original Windows NT setup diskettes or CD ROM to complete this procedure For information on installing a driver for a Windows NT 4 0 client on a Windows NT 3 51 server refer to the Tektronix on line services See lf you need help for instructions on using the on line services 1 Inthe Print
92. PC Windows software for instructions on installing the printer s utility files Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Use one of the following methods to send the FRMTDISK PS file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file INITIALIZING A FORMATTED SCSI HARD DISK Initializing a formatted SCSI hard disk Some hard disks are formatted at the factory check the documentation that came with your hard disk to see if the disk needs formatting If your SCSI hard disk is formatted it only needs to be initialized Use this procedure to initialize the hard disk If your SCSI hard disk is not formatted refer to Formatting a SCSI hard disk for formatting and initializing instructions Click on the following topics for more information m Macintosh users EI PC and workstation users INITIALIZING A FORMATTED SCSI HARD DISK Macintosh users Refer to Macintosh software for instructions on installing the printer s files Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the
93. Preview a On m Off Available only with the Extended Features option Print TekColor Options Print Preview Page Rotation Page Rotation O degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees Print TekColor Options m Page Rotation Page Centering a On a Off Page Centering Print TekColor Options m Page Centering PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver Tektronix Phaser 600 Feature Description Driver selection Image Smoothing Image Smoothing Print a On TekColor Options a Off Image Smoothing Color Control Strip Color Control Strip Print a On TekColor Options a Off Color Control Strip Mirror Print Mirror Print Page Setup a On Options a Off Flip Horizontal Vertical PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver Adobe PSPrinter and Apple LaserWriter 8 x Feature Description Driver selection Media size m ANSI A B C D E m ISO A4 A3 A2 A1 AO a JIS B1 B2 B3 BA a Arch A B C D E m 30 x 42 in Custom sizes Selecting media by size Page Setup Paper Media source m Manual Feed m Roll Feed Selecting media by size Print Paper Source Print quality modes Standard m Enhanced Print quality modes Print Print Options Print Quality PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver Adobe PSPrinter and Apple LaserWriter 8 x cont d Feature Description Driver selection
94. Print from the list the PhaserPrint dialog box appears In the Printer field select Phaser 600 USING THE PLUG IN PhaserPrint software supports the following image modes selected from Photoshop s Mode menu If you select a mode not listed here an error message appears and your image is not printed Bitmap Grayscale Indexed Color RGB Color CMYK Color Lab Color However in Photoshop 2 5 1 if you select an image mode not supported by the PhaserPrint software the following inaccurate error message appears Could not complete the PhaserPrint command because the export module does not work with Bitmap images The error message does not list the specific unsupported color mode you selected USING THE PLUG IN Selecting options in the PhaserPrint dialog box Click on the following topics for more information Number of copies Mirror print Print using Macintosh Center page Print using Windows No margins Printer model Image smoothing Media size Color control strip Color correction Stylized representation of the page Quality Scaling an image Fusing Landscape orientation Advance media Center images Cut media Replicate images m Page rotation Image size m Rendering intent Image separation m Compress image data Number of images m Fast preview Image layout m Manual feed Media size m Print preview Show color preview of image USING THE PLUG IN Number of copies Enter the n
95. RINTERS Setting up unique desktop printers You can create more than one desktop printer of the same physical printer Each desktop printer can be set up with different print modes or options and given a descriptive name This feature makes it easy to print to a specific printer with the options you want already selected In the illustration below a desktop printer has been created of a Phaser 600 printer with the Vivid Color color correction and the Paper media type selections Create a desktop printer see Creating a desktop printer for instructions Select highlight a desktop printer icon The Printing menu appears in the menu bar at the top of the Macintosh screen Use the Printer Driver Defaults command in the Printing menu to select options for desktop printers see Selecting printing options for details To rename the desktop printer highlight the icon on the desktop and type a new name Renaming a desktop printer has no effect on the printer s name in the Chooser PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Printing with a desktop printer If you are using QuickDraw GX applications do one of the following Select any desktop printer in the Print dialog box Drag a document onto a desktop printer icon The application corresponding to the document opens prints the document and then quits If you are using non QuickDraw GX applications do one of the following Print to the default desktop printer with the Print command
96. RINTING FROM A PC Driver selection Page Centering Page Centering a On m Off Print Properties Advanced tab m Printer Features Page Centering Image Smoothing a On m Off Image Smoothing Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Image Smoothing Color Control Strip a On a Off Color Control Strip Print Properties Advanced tab Printer Features Color Control Strip Driver for Windows NT 4 0 cont d Feature Description PRINTING FROM A PC Driver selection Mirror Print Mirror Print a On m Off Print Properties Advanced tab m Printer Features Mirror Print PRINTING FROM A PC Using the Microsoft PostScript driver with Windows 95 To select printing options follow these steps 1 In the Printers window click the Phaser 600 printer icon with the right mouse button then select Properties from the menu Click the following tabs to see printing options refer to your Windows 95 documentation for more information on tabs and options Click the Details tab to see timeout and other options m Set the Timeout settings Not Selected Type a value from 0 to 999 in this text box to change the number of seconds Windows waits before notifying you that a printer is off line The default is 15 seconds Transmission Retry On large or multiple page documents you may see an Alert message that the printer is no longer accepting data be
97. Replicate images option to produce multiple copies of an image on a single page Alert message The following message appears in the dialog box whenever a scaled image will not fit within the image area of the currently selected page size or orientation option Image clipping will occur USING THE PLUG IN Landscape orientation Check this box to print the image horizontally landscape on the page Leave this box unchecked to print the image vertically portrait on the page Refer to the stylized representation of the page in the lower left corner of the dialog box to see how your selection will look when printed USING THE PLUG IN Center images Check this box to center the image in the image area of the page If this box is not checked the lower left corner of the image is aligned with the lower left corner of the printable area of the page If the Center images box is checked and the Replicate images box is checked the set of replicated images are centered in the image area of the page USING THE PLUG IN Replicate images m Check this box to fill the image area of the page with as many copies of the image as will fit The size of each replicated image is determined by the setting in the Scale text box If the size of each replicated image shown as black rectangles in the stylized representation of the page is too small to display the total image area of the printed page is shown as a single gray r
98. Script files and raster files in the Sun Raster Format SRF xwd SGI RGB and other formats The printer s CD ROM contains a demonstration copy of the PhaserPrint software and an on line instruction guide in the phaserpr unx directory Refer to Printing from a workstation for more information NOTE sy v To order PhaserPrint software use Tektronix order number 4690F20 EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM PhaserSym For printing in VMS environments Tektronix offers PhaserSym PhaserSym is a VMS print symbiont for DEC OpenVMS VAX and DEC OpenVMS AXP machines PhaserSym facilitates communication between VMS hosts and Tektronix Phaser printers PhaserSym requires that the Phaser printer include Ethernet support NOTE Sx 4 7v To order PhaserSym use Tektronix order number 4690F41 EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM SCSI hard disk The printer is equipped with an internal 1 Gbyte SCSI hard disk You can also attach a Tektronix approved external SCSI hard disk order number Z350DSk to the printer s SCSI port You can connect one or more external SCSI hard disks to the printer for additional font storage Contact Technical Support for recommended SCSI disk drives Tektronix 7 REGULATORY INFORMATION Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer OVERVIEW Overview Click on the following topics for more information Canadian EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility regulatory standards Declaration of conformity for 2
99. TE sy When requesting multiple copies of an image always use the Copystation s of Copies command the printer s front panel Copies function is unavailable PHASER COPYSTATION Scaling images from the Copystation Automatic scaling When the printer s front panel selection for Media Size matches the size of media that is installed in the printer an image sent from the Copystation is automatically scaled up to fill the media s printable image area Custom scaling To scale an image by a specific amount use the Copystation s Scale function m Reduces the size of an image so that it is smaller than the installed media s printable area m Enlarges or reduces the image by a specific amount also used when the front panel s media size setting does not match the installed media NOTE Sx 4 v When sending an image from the Copystation to the printer always use the Copystation s Scale command the printer s front panel Scale function does not affect Copystation output Getting the best results PHASER COPYSTATION You can scan an image for example an 8 x 10 in photograph on the Phaser Copystation at pre determined scale percentages and your printer automatically scales the output to fit the selected media size 1 Printer s front panel set the default page size for the desired copy size Place the original image on the Copystation starting in the upper right corner Copystation s front
100. TY DATA SHEETS MSDS for ink SECTION PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION Trade Name Tektronix Part No ColorStix Ink Black 016 1453 00 ColorStix Ink Cyan 016 1454 00 ColorStix Ink Magenta 016 1455 00 ColorStix Ink Yellow 016 1456 00 Product Use Tektronix Phaser 600 printers SECTION 2 INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS Fatty amide waxes Rosin ester Phthalate ester black cyan magenta and yellow dyes The specific identity of ingredients and their percentage composition is withheld as a trade secret MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS SECTION 3 HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION ROUTES OF EXPOSURE Skin POTENTIAL HEALTH EFFECTS Immediate effects None expected See section 11 for toxicology test information Long Term effects None expected Carcinogenicity None of the ingredients of this product are listed as carcinogens by either OSHA NTP or IARC SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF EXPOSURE None expected MEDICAL CONDITIONS AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE None expected SECTION 4 FIRST AID MEASURES EYE Contact unlikely If any particles get into eye flush thoroughly with water SKIN Wash skin thoroughly with soap and water INHALATION Not applicable INGESTION Not applicable MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS SECTION 5 FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES FLASH POINT Above 200 F NFPA class 3B FIRE amp EXPLOSION HAZARDS These inks will burn No unusual hazards are expected SECTION 6 ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES SPILL OR LEAK Not
101. Tektronix W4 WELCOME This is the home page of the Phaser 600 Color Printer User Manual See Tips on using this guide or go immediately to the Contents Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer Tips on using this guide m Use the navigation buttons in Acrobat Reader to move through the document 123 4 5 6 1 and 4 are the First Page and Last Page buttons These buttons move to the first or last page of a document 2 and 3 are the Previous Page and Next Page buttons These buttons move the document backward or forward one page at a time 5 and 6 are the Go Back and Go Forward buttons These buttons let you retrace your steps through a document moving to each page or view in the order visited For best results use the Adobe Acrobat Reader version 2 1 to read this guide Version 2 1 of the Acrobat Reader is supplied on your printers CD ROM Click on the page numbers in the Contents on the following pages to open the topics you want to read You can click on the page numbers following keywords in the Index to open topics of interest You can also use the Bookmarks provided by the Acrobat Reader to navigate through this guide If the Bookmarks are not already displayed at the left of the window select Bookmarks and Page from the View menu If you have difficultly reading any small type or seeing the details in any of the illustrations you can use the Acrobat Reader s Magnification feature Select a Magnification value
102. The printer is running an automatic cleaning operation approximately 5 minutes No user action required No user action required No user action required The printer is automatically cutting the roll media No user action required Displayed during print jobs that require large amounts of ink The printer is ready for the media to be loaded Replace the media roll No user action required May be displayed after you press the Cancel button FRONT PANEL MESSAGES Front panel messages cont d Message Action Close Top Cover Close Exit Cover Close Ink Loader Lock Top Cover Empty Waste Bin Service Required Fault Code xx Ink Loader Low lt color gt Ink Low Close the top cover you may need to fully open and then close the cover and its latch Close the exit cover Close the cover on the ink loader Make sure that the latch on the top cover is locked Remove empty and reinsert the waste bin Turn the printer off wait at least 15 seconds and turn the printer s power on again If the failure persists note the code number in the display In the U S call Tektronix service at 1 800 835 6100 Outside the U S contact your local Tektronix office This message appears when the ink loader has two or fewer ink sticks of a particular color Open the cover of the ink loader and load ink sticks of that color This message appears when ink loader is empty of a particular color The printhead
103. Under Files select the 7EK_600 PAL file and select the Load button PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART Printing the PANTONE Color sampler chart Use the PANTONE Color sampler chart for your printer to select colors within an application that allows you to specify PANTONE Colors For more information on using PANTONE Colors see the related topics on the Tektronix World Wide Web server at http www tek com Color_Printers There are two ways to print the PANTONE Color sampler chart for your Phaser 600 printer m Open the PANTONE Phaser 600 paf PANT600 PDF file in Adobe s Acrobat Reader application and print the pages you want Printing individual pages from Acrobat Download the PANTONE Phaser 600 ps PANT600 PS file to the printer to print the entire sampler chart 46 pages in length Printing the entire chart MAE sy v Use the None color correction in a driver or the No Color Correction downloadable utility file or TekColor None on the printer s front panel when printing the PANTONE Color sampler chart or when printing PANTONE Colors from an application Using any other color correction will cause PANTONE Colors to print incorrectly PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART Printing individual pages from Acrobat You can open the PANTONE Phaser 600 paf PANT600 PDF file in Adobe s Acrobat Reader application and print just the pages you want Make sure you print on the chart on the same media you
104. Use media at least B size for better feed media ANSI A ISO A4 and reliability Arch A or smaller Roll media is not cut evenly or Make sure that the cutter is sharp use a smoothly new blade in the cutting tool for manual cutting Front panel reports An ink stick has jammed in the Remove the jammed ink stick See ink loader Clearing an ink jam Clear Ink Loader Jam SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print Symptom Solution Printer not operating Make sure that you plugged in the printer and turned it on Make sure that you connected the interface cable s properly Make a test print from the front panel to verify that the controller board is functional Verify that your computer can communicate with the printer Printer not operating cont d Verify that your printer can communicate If you have a Macintosh Make sure that you have the correct PPD file installed and selected and that you have selected the printer in the Chooser If the printer s name does not appear in the Chooser your LocalTalk or EtherTalk connection may be faulty See also Printer doesn t appear in the Chooser Macintosh below You can use the Print Window command to send a file to the printer without using an application If the communication link between your computer and the printer is working the printer produces a directory listing of the active window on the desktop SYMPTOMS A
105. Using the color rendering intents Enabling and disabling job pipelining Modifying the Advance Media default Setting page offset Adding Control D characters to PC files Configuring a printer s serial port Other utilities INSTALLING THE UTILITY FILES Installing the utility files Click on the following topics for more information Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printer s CD ROM Installing the PC utility files Downloading files from the Tektronix World Wide Web site Downloading files from the Tektronix ftp server INSTALLING THE UTILITY FILES Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printer s CD ROM Insert the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive Double click the Phaser 600 Installer icon Click Continue until the Easy Install window appears Select Custom Install from the pull down menu Select one of the driver options and the Printer Utilities item from the list You need to install one of the driver to install the LaserWriter Utility Click Install The software is installed in a Printer Utilities folder inside a PhaserTools folder created on your hard disk by the printer s installer INSTALLING THE UTILITY FILES Installing the PC utility files The utility files are available on the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM and diskette 1 Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the printer s software Select the Printe
106. Windows NT 3 5 3 51 4 0 PostScript driver AdobePS 3 PostScript driver Color charts and color library files Printer specific utility files Utility files for using the printer on a network Application for creating custom profiles Adobe Acrobat PDF versions of the printers manuals Application for viewing on line manuals phsrtool pantone phsrtool phsr600 phsrtoolinet_util phsrtool phsrmtch phsrtool manuals Available only on the printer s CD ROM PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Installing printer software for Windows 4 Insert either the printer s CD ROM or the Windows Disk 1 into the appropriate drive on your computer ge For Windows 95 For Windows 3 1 Click the Start icon in the 2 Select Run from the File menu taskbar Click Run 4 Type in the drive for either the CD ROM or diskette and type SETUP EXE Click OK Click Next in the next two screens Select Easy or Custom Install and click Next ge Z NX PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Installing printer software for Windows cont d For Windows 95 and Windows 3 1 Kk Easy Install Custom Install Go to Step 6 Follow the on screen prompts to select items in the dialog boxes 4 Note The Tektronix driver for Windows 3 1 must be installed in the Windows directory default Destination Directory Do not change the Destination Directory when installing the Tektronix driver unless you are installing the driver on a ne
107. X Macintosh Driver Tektronix Phaser 600 Feature Description PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Driver selection Media size m ANSI A B C D E m ISO A4 A3 A2 A1 AO a JIS B1 B2 B3 BA a Arch A B C D E m 30 x 42 in Custom sizes Selecting media by size Page Setup Paper Custom sizes not available Media source m Manual Feed m Roll Feed Selecting media_ by size Print Paper Source Print quality modes Standard m Enhanced Print quality modes Print TekColor Options Print Quality Macintosh Driver Tektronix Phaser 600 Feature Description PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Driver selection Color correction m None default a Vivid Color Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Custom Profile Color corrections Print TekColor Options m Color Correction Fusing Mode m Cold m Hot m None Fusing Mode Media Fusing Print TekColor Options Fusing Mode Cut Media m Never m After each page m After each job Cut Media Print TekColor Options Cut Media Macintosh Driver Tektronix Phaser 600 Feature Description PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Driver selection Advance Media Advance Media m Never m After each page After each job a Allow Hot Fusing Print TekColor Options Advance Media Print Preview Print
108. a by size Paper tab Paper Size Media source m Manual Feed m Roll Feed Selecting media_ by size Paper tab Paper Source Print quality modes Standard m Enhanced Print quality modes Features tab Print Quality Driver for Windows 3 1 Feature PRINTING FROM A PC AdobePS 3 PostScript Driver cont d Description Driver selection Color correction m None default a Vivid Color Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Custom Profile Color corrections Features tab Color Correction Fusing Mode m Cold m Hot m None Fusing Mode Features tab Media Fusing Furie lee Cut Media m Never m After each page m After each job Cut Media Features tab Cut Media PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 3 1 AdobePS 3 PostScript Driver cont d Feature Description Driver selection Advance Media Advance Media Features tab m Never Advance Media m After each page After each job a Allow Hot Fusing Print Preview Print Preview Features tab a On m Print Preview a Off Available only with the Extended Features option Page Rotation Page Rotation Features tab 9 degrees m Page Rotation 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees Page Centering Page Centering Features tab a On m Page Centering a Off PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 3 1
109. able or disable 500 from a Macintosh 501 from aPC 503 SYSTART PS PC utility file 503 T technical support 581 Tek Error Handler using from a Macintosh 635 fromaPC 635 TekColor corrections 197 options 155 TEKEHAND PS PC utility file 635 Tektronix Color Printer Information Server 430 ftp server downloading files from _430 Tektronix Bulletin Board Service BBS _78 581 Tektronix driver for Windows 3 1 setting up 56 using 109 test print 597 thumbnail image in Print Preview 235 A BCD EF GH timeouts 610 disable 396 job 517 parallel port 507 wait 517 Windows 95 driver 101 105 116 Windows printer driver 111 Token Ring PhaserShare card and protocols 31 trademark information _762 transit restraint removing 18 Transmission Retry Windows 3 1 111 116 Windows 95 101 105 transport rollers cleaning 542 troubleshooting _585 615 black and white prints instead of color 617 clearing media jams 670 cut off images 615 media jams 599 611 612 media skewing 613 media wrinkling 614 off set dots 616 power light blinks but file doesn t print 601 print job does not finish _610 printer doesn t appear in the Chooser 609 startup page prints when disabled 669 streaks or spots 616 JK L MN OPQ TrueType fonts 6 183 186 turning on the printer 32 33 34 type of media _170 U UNIDIR PS PC utility file 508 UNIX workstations 145 installing printer software _78 unpacking 10 11 15 upgrade kits _735 Ethernet
110. acintosh _295 PC 299 PageMaker 6 0 PANTONE color library file Macintosh 296 PANTONE color charts printing from a Macintosh 301 printing from a PC 301 Colors printing 644 printer files installing Macintosh 288 PC _289 using Macintosh _286 PC _286 paper handling 658 loading 39 ordering _729 paper clamp cleaning 546 paper guides cleaning 540 paper roll holder 40 paper roll loading 41 parallel cables 30 STU VW X Y Z cables ordering _732 port connecting 30 port default language 181 parallel port computer see LPT port disabling timeouts 507 MODE command _507 pinout 510 Pause menu front panel 236 687 693 PC DOS printing from _393 PC utility files ADDCTRLD BAT 471 ADVMEDIA PS 464 AIS PS 526 BIDIR PS 508 CMYK PS _256 CONFIG PS 518 CTRLD PS 471 CUTJOB PS 478 CUTNEVER PS 478 CUTNOW PS _478 CUTPAGE PS _478 DEVPARAM PS 473 ENHANCED PS 477 FONTS PS 192 FRMTDISK PS 496 FUSECOLD PS 478 FUSEHOT PS 478 FUSENONE PS 478 HPGL PS 525 HPGLPENS PS 530 A BCD EF GH HPGLTEST PLT 528 HSB PS _256 INITDISK PS 499 installing 428 MENULONG PS _724 MENUSHRT PS 724 MIROROFF PS 478 MIRRORON PS 478 NOSTRTPG PS 718 NOSYSTRT PS 503 OFFSETXY PS _470 PIPE_OFF PS 460 PIPE_ON PS _460 PRNTCNFG PS 704 PRNTSTPG PS 711 PSCRIPT PS 524 PSTEST PS 529 RAWCMYK PS 213 RAWRGB PS 213 RENDABS PS 458 RENDPER PS 458 RENDREL PS 458 RENDSAT PS 458 RESET PS 447 RGB PS 256 ROTAT180 PS 478 ROTAT270 PS 478 ROTATE90 PS 478 ROT
111. ader _103 107 PostScript tab 103 107 problems with printer fonts 653 timeouts 101 105 116 639 using 101 105 115 Windows 95 software installing 51 setting up 54 Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 driver using 118 setting up a driver 58 Windows NT 4 0 driver using 119 setting up a driver 63 setting up on anetwork 65 workstation software EasyCopy X 147 407 installing _78 PhaserPrint for UNIX 146 406 742 PhaserSym _407 World Wide Web 581 downloading files from _429
112. al port the extra characters will start a new job and the printer times out after a few minutes To avoid this copy the CTRLD PS file to the printer after you send the PRNTNAME PS file see CTRLD PS for more information on the CTRLD PS file Use one of the following methods to send the file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file RESETTING THE PRINTER Resetting the printer The Reset Printer RESET PS file resets the printer to its power on conditions not its factory default conditions without turning the printer s power switch off and on The power on conditions include any custom changes made to the printer that are stored in the printer s NVRAM or changes that are persistent across printer power cycles For example if you used a downloadable utility file to change the printer s name or to set a color correction these are power on conditions that are not altered by resetting the printer Resetting the printer erases changes that are not persistent across printer power cycles such as the Tektronix error handler utility and custom color profiles This file restarts the printer as soon as all the jobs in its queue are finished The printer remains unavailable while it initializes Click on the following topics for more inform
113. ally install the software or select the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Select one of the following files m Use the STARTPG PS file to enable printing of the printer s startup page m Use the NOSTRIPG PS file to disable the printer s startup page Use one of the following methods to send the desired file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager m Workstation users Send a file to the printer as you would any PostScript file ENABLING AND DISABLING THE STARTUP PAGE Enabling and disabling the startup page with PhaserLink software Refer to the PhaserShare Status Software User Manual for information on using your World Wide Web browser to access the printer ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT PANEL MENUS Enabling and disabling front panel menus System administrators may choose to limit user access to front panel menus by downloading a utility file to the printer The lock utility file prevents most menu items from being displayed on the front panel The capability of limiting menu access is often useful when a system administrator needs to retain control of the printer s settings For example selections made on the printer s front panel can af
114. alog box again from within your application the page size selection may be blank The page size you just selected in the driver is still selected it is just not visible in the list Print as usual TE Vy v If you open the Print Setup dialog box from within an application and the page size selection is blank the blank represents the page size last selected from the printer driver through the Control Panel You can leave the page size selection blank and print as usual or you can select a page size from the list SELECTING PAGE SIZES IN WINDOWS APPLICATIONS Windows 95 Click the Start icon in the taskbar on your screen a menu appears Move the cursor over Settings another menu appears In the menu click Printers the Printers window appears In the Printers window select the Phaser 600 printer icon then select Properties from the File menu Click the Paper tab Choose a page size and click OK Return to your application FONTS PRINTING INCORRECTLY FROM WINDOWS Fonts printing incorrectly from Windows If fonts are printing incorrectly from Windows make sure that you installed the correct printer with the supported driver m If you have the standard printer configuration you should have installed Tektronix Phaser 600 If you have the printer s Extended Features option with the additional fonts you should have installed Tektronix Phaser 600 with Extended Features so that Windows recognizes and uses all the
115. anded dialog box Row of icons The scrollable icon list on the left side of the dialog box shows the printing extensions that are available to the printer driver When selected the General icon displays the normal Page Setup options Select another icon to see a new Set of options Refer to Apple s QuickDraw GX documentation for instructions on installing printing extensions refer to Using printing extensions to use the Extensions Setup command in the Printing menu to enable installed printing extensions Paper Type This is a list of page sizes available for the selected printer Refer to Page size print area and margins for details on page size Orientation and Scale These are standard driver options described in Apple s documentation Format for This pop up menu allows you to select a different desktop printer for formatting your document PRINTING FROM QUICKDRAW GX APPLICATIONS Using the Print dialog box Select Print from the File menu then click the More Choices button to see the expanded dialog box m Row of icons The scrollable icon list on the left side of the dialog box shows the printing extensions that are available to the printer driver When selected the General icon displays the normal Print options Select another icon to see a new Set of options Print Time and Paper Match are part of the QuickDraw GX software and are always available The rest of the options in this dialog box are standard driver op
116. anel Printer information appears on the lower line of the display EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM Advantages of adding memory In general more memory improves throughput reduces the level of compression provides more storage for downloadable fonts and allows printing of the most complex images Additional memory can also reduce offload time by increasing the size of input buffers for the I O ports The following table summarizes the memory configurations for the printer printer Memory Total Performance Benefit memory Standard 8 Mbytes Base configuration Add one 16 Mbyte SIMM 24 Mbytes Increases virtual memory I O buffers Improves throughput and performance Add one 32 Mbyte SIMM 40 Mbytes EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM PhaserShare network cards Tektronix PhaserShare network cards offer high performance network connectivity for your color printer PhaserShare network cards can be easily installed in your printer Order number Description Z350FP1 Adds Ethernet interface includes support for Novell NetWare EtherTalk TCP IP Telnet and FTP Same as Option P1 Z350FP3 Adds LocalTalk Serial interface Same as Option P3 Z350FP4 Adds Token Ring interface includes support for Novell NetWare TokenTalk TCP IP Telnet and FTP Same as Option P4 Benefits of networking the printer Adding a PhaserShare network card to your printer makes it an efficient sharable printing resource in network
117. anel for configuration information 7 Type in the drive s path from Step 5 click Continue 8 Click Ignore when prompted for the location of the PSCRPTUI DLL and PSCRIPT DLL files 9 In the Create Printer dialog box fill in the other fields as desired then click OK 10 Select options in the PostScript Printer Setup dialog box Click OK Recommended enable the Use Printer Halftoning option 11 If you installed a PostScript printer in Step 3 delete it now a Select the printer you want to remove b Select Remove Printer in the Printer menu Click OK End PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 TCP IP Connection AppleTalk Connection Y Note Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 include network software called Services for Macintosh AppleTalk and TCP IP print services for TCP IP lpr print services Refer to your Windows NT manual for instructions on installing this network software After this software is loaded follow these steps 1 Select Create a new printer in the Print Manager select the appropriate printer driver 2 Select Other in the Print to field of the From the Printer Properties dialog box 3 Select LPR Port for Available Print 3 Select AppleTalk Printing Monitors click OK Devices for Available Print Monitors click OK 4 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 cont d TCP I
118. aning the printhead If your prints have missing dots or a missing horizontal line clean the printhead using the front panel menu function 1 Press the Menu button on the front panel 2 Press an arrow button gt until the front panel displays this message UciLlLicLes gt Menu Press the Menu button Press an arrow button until the front panel displays this message Clean Head lt gt Select Press the Select button The front panel displays messages while it cleans the printhead this takes approximately 5 minutes OCCASIONAL CLEANING Press an arrow button until you see this message Test Print gt Print Press the Print button the Test Print demonstrates the condition of the printhead jets If this does not clear the problem turn the printer off for two hours When you turn the printer on again print the Test Print from the Utilities menu in the front panel If the problem still exists you may need to call for a service technician to manually clean the head wiper Refer to If you need help for information EMPTYING THE WASTE BIN Emptying the waste bin The waste bin remains locked in place until it needs emptying There are two conditions when you should empty the waste bin m Front panel displays Empty Waste Bin E Before moving the printer When you prepare the printer for shipment or move the printer a long distance in which case you must use the Utilities menu
119. ap lt gt Print Press the left arrow lt or right arrow gt buttons until the following message appears Configuration Page lt gt Print Press the Print button to print a configuration page PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE Printing the configuration page with a downloadable utility file Use one of the following methods to download a utility file to the printer to print the configuration page m Macintosh utility file Configuration Page PC utility file PRNICNFG PS PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE Macintosh utility file Configuration Page NOTE sy v If you are using QuickDraw GX you can use the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX driver to print a copy of the configuration page Install the utility files from the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM see Macintosh software for instructions Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the Configuration Page file from the list then click Open This file was installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type anew name Click Save t
120. ap m Printing the menu map from the front panel E Printing the menu map with PhaserLink software 1 PRINTING THE FRONT PANEL MENU MAP Printing the menu map from the front panel While the Ready message is displayed press the Menu button The printer displays the first item in the menu Help Pages Z Menu Press the Menu button to access the Help Pages The following message appears Menu Map lt gt Print Press the Print button to print a menu map page PRINTING THE FRONT PANEL MENU MAP Printing the menu map with PhaserLink software Refer to the PhaserShare Status Software User Manual for information on using your World Wide Web browser to access the printer PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE Printing the configuration page A configuration page is similar to the printer s startup page but it also provides details about each available port There are several ways to print the configuration page m Printing the configuration page from the front panel E Printing the configuration page with a downloadable utility file m Printing the configuration page with PhaserLink software PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE Printing the configuration page from the front panel 1 While the Ready message is displayed press the Menu button The printer displays the first item in the menu Help Pages Sa SSS Menu Press the Menu button to access the Help Pages The following message appears Menu M
121. applicable SECTION 7 HANDLING AND STORAGE HANDLING No special precautions STORAGE Avoid high temperatures SECTION 8 EXPOSURE CONTROL PERSONAL PROTECTION EXPOSURE GUIDELINES None established ENGINEERING CONTROLS PERSONAL PROTECTION No special protection indicated when used as intended MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS SECTION 9 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES APPEARANCE ODOR Waxy solid Black blue red or yellow in color Odorless SOLUBILITY Not water soluble SECTION 10 STABILITY AND REACTIVITY STABILITY Stable INCOMPATIBILITY WITH OTHER MATERIALS None HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION Will not occur SECTION 11 TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION TOXICITY Not toxic as determined by standard laboratory tests for acute oral toxicity SKIN IRRITATION Not a primary skin irritant as determined by standard laboratory tests SKIN SENSITIZATION Not a skin sensitizer as determined by standard laboratory tests CARCINOGENICITY No ingredients of this product are listed as carcinogens by OSHA NTP or IARC MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS SECTION 12 ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION No known impact SECTION 13 DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS This product is not a hazardous waste as specified in 40CFR261 TCLP below hazardous waste levels set by EPA Manage and dispose of waste in accordance with all federal state and local regulations SECTION 14 TRANSPORT INFORMATION D O T Not regulated NMFC 101720 Sub 3 Ink Print
122. area code area code area code area code area code area code area code area code just enter your fax number area code fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number fax number number FRONT PANEL MESSAGES Front panel messages The front panel displays messages indicating the condition of the printer Some messages such as Standby and Warming Up simply provide status information These messages do not require user action Error messages Such aS Close Exit Cover require you to perform some action Use the following table to determine the appropriate action for each type of front panel message The printer may display a numeric error code when it detects certain types of problems If you see a numeric error code first write down the number Try turning off the printer s power and wait at least 15 seconds before turning the power on again If that does not solve the problem call your local Tektronix office for assistance or call Tektronix Service at 1 800 835 6100 U S or at 1 800 563 1289 Canada Front panel messages Message FRONT PANEL MESSAGES Action Ready Cleaning Feeding Loading Unloading Cutting Melting Ink Load Media End of Roll Cancelling Job No user action required The printer is ready to print No user action required
123. art You can download the PANTONE Phaser 600 ps PANT600 PS file to the printer This is a PostScript file that contains the necessary color correction print quality and media size information Make sure you print the chart on paper for best results The file prints 46 Letter size pages you can manually feed Letter size paper to print this chart or use roll media E Printing the entire chart Macintosh E Printing the entire chart PC Click Pantone overview to return to the main topics list PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART Printing the entire chart Macintosh NOTE sy v If you are using QuickDraw GX you can print the PANTONE Color sampler chart from the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX printer driver see Downloading printer utilities for instructions See Installing the Macintosh files if you haven t already installed the files Locate the files in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser To print the chart do the following a Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application b Select Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu c Select the PANTONE Phaser 600 ps file and click Open This file was installed in the Pantone Files folder inside the Phaser Tools folder PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART d Atthe prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file
124. ation Resetting the printer from a Macintosh m Resetting the printer from a PC RESETTING THE PRINTER Resetting the printer from a Macintosh NOTE sy v Do not use the Restart Printer command in the LaserWriter Utility s Utilities menu Follow this procedure to reset the printer using the LaserWriter Utility to download the Reset Printer utility file Follow the instructions in Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printer s CD ROM to install the printer s software Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the Reset Printer file in the list then click Open This file was installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder RESETTING THE PRINTER NOTE wy The sien of resetting the printer takes a few minutes to complete You will receive a message on your screen indicating the connection has been interrupted during the reset The connection is re established after the reset so you can ignore this message click the Continue button Atthe prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type in a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer
125. ay color correction description _204 selecting from the front panel 152 selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 SMOOTHON PS PC utility file _478 SMOTHOFF PS PC utility file 478 SNAP Press color correction _205 description _205 selecting from the front panel 152 selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 software CD ROM 10 51 diskettes 51 installation 46 network utilities 421 solid ink 2 solutions problem solving 596 special printing features _221 JK LM N OPQ specifications _759 standard configuration 2 fonts 183 Standard print quality mode _154 Standard Quality Macintosh utility files 477 STANDARD PS PC utility file 477 starter paper roll 39 startup page _36 669 enable or disable 713 from a Macintosh 717 from a PC 718 from the front panel 714 printing _706 from a Macintosh _709 fromaPC 711 from the front panel 707 prints when disabled 669 reports error message 669 status reporting bi directional interface 508 streaks or spots on prints 616 supplies and accessories 618 726 Made For Each Other _727 ordering _729 surge protector 33 SWOP Press color correction description _205 selecting from the front panel 152 Selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 R SIT UV WXYZ Selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 symptoms and solutions 596 Phaser 600 Quick Reference Guide 596 Sys Start Job en
126. cript files use the PSCRIPT PS file to set up a port to receive PostScript see Printing PostScript files or World Wide Web for details m To print HP GL files use the HPGL PS file to set up a port to receive HP GL see Printing HP GL files or World Wide Web for details m To print PostScript or HP GL files use the AIS PS file to set up a port for automatic language selection see Enabling automatic language selection or World Wide Web SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution Printer doesn t appear in the Chooser Macintosh Try another network connection Try printing from another computer Make sure that the printer is turned on and the cables are correctly attached Check the termination refer to the documentation for your network adapter or connector for information on termination If you have changed the printers name make sure that you have given it a unique name not the same as any other printer in the zone or on the network Make sure that the correct network zone is selected in either the Network Control Panel or the AppleTalk Control Panel in System 7 5 3 or later For network connected printers Problems may occur when double spooling occurs or banner pages are specified Refer to Tektronix on line documentation or contact your network administrator for more help on troubleshooting your specific type of network SYMPT
127. cutter blade is sharp To avoid injury always handle it by its shaft or yellow protective cover a Slide the lever on the cutter to unlock it 9480 30 CD b Lift the cutter out of the printer If you are replacing the fuser components dispose of the old components as normal office waste OCCASIONAL CLEANING Cleaning the fuser shuttle If you have a small vacuum or air canister use it to remove the paper dust Clean the belt near the foam oiler wheel with a ary lint free cloth aaa If you notice ink in the fuser shuttle area wipe it with a foam swab that has been moistened with 90 isopropyl alcohol UTION Be careful not to get any alcohol on the front and rear rails of the fuser shuttle or the shelf underneath the shuttle It is oiled for smooth travel and the alcohol will remove the lubricant 4 OCCASIONAL CLEANING If you are not replacing the fuser wheel wipe it with an alcohol moistened lint free cloth 9480 45 OCCASIONAL CLEANING Cleaning the exit rollers Clean the exit rollers whenever you clean the fuser shuttle or replace its components Using an alcohol moistened lint free cloth clean these parts 9480 29 a Wipe the metal exit rolle
128. d double click its icon to start the application Select Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the file you want sent to the printer and click Open The printer s utility files were installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder Atthe prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use the default name given in the edit box or type in anew name Printer output includes status messages generated by the printer reporting such conditions as out of paper Click Save to send the file to the printer If no Output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK in the box to continue If output is returned by the printer you won t see this dialog box check your hard disk for the file the utility created for the printer s output DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Using the LaserWriter Utility to perform other tasks In addition to downloading PostScript files and fonts you can use the LaserWriter Utility to perform the following specialized tasks E Enabling and disabling the startup page m Changing the printer s name DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Downloading files from the Phaser 600 GX driver If you are using QuickDraw GX you can use the Phaser 600 GX driver to download utility files to the printer Use the Send PostScript File command in the Printing menu to download PostScript files to
129. dditional memory 16 Mbytes or 32 Mbytes for improved performance For information on ordering a Copystation refer to Phaser Copystation order number 4540 For information on ordering additional memory refer to Memory upgrade PHASER COPYSTATION Connecting the Copystation The Phaser Copystation User Manual is shipped with the Copystation it contains detailed instructions for connecting and using the Copystation with your printer Keep these tips in mind when connecting the Copystation m Always turn off the power to the printer and all SCSI devices before making connections The printer and Copystation have built in SCSI termination If other SCSI devices are also connected to the printer make sure that the Copystation is the last device in the chain and that the other devices terminators are disabled Make sure that there are no conflicts in SCSI ID numbers for any of the SCSI devices connected to the printer The Copystation uses SCSI ID numbers 5 and 6 the printer uses SCSI ID numbers 7 and 4 Always turn on SCSI peripheral devices the Copystation and external disks at least one minute before turning on the printer PHASER COPYSTATION Setting the print quantity The Copystation s front panel allows you to specify the number of copies you want output from the printer 1 Press the of Copies button on the Copystation use the keypad to enter the number of copies you want 2 Press the Copy button NO
130. dialog box In the Options dialog box click the Printer Features button to see the Tektronix Printer Features dialog box Make color correction print quality and other selections as desired Click OK to return to the Options dialog box PRINTING FROM A PC Click OK to return to the dialog box that lists your printer s name across the top Make the following printing selections Paper Source Paper Size 12 Orientation Copies NOTE Ag A 7v You may want to set the number of copies from your application because the number of copies in the Setup dialog box remains the same until you change it again Also if you are printing multiple pages make sure that the Transmission Retry is set for at least 600 seconds 10 minutes PRINTING FROM A PC Using the Adobe PostScript driver for Windows 3 1 To select printing options follow these steps From the Control Panel double click Printers In the Printers dialog box select the Tektronix Phaser 600 printer then click Setup A dialog box appears with the printer s name across the top Click the following tabs to see printing options refer to your Windows documentation for more information on tabs and options m Click the Paper tab to see media options such as media sizes and media source use manual feed for cut sheet media Click the Features tab to see printer specific options such as color corrections PRINTING FROM A PC Set the Timeout settings No
131. do one of the following m Check to see if other Tektronix Phaser series printers are listed and choose one of those If no Tektronix Phaser series printers are listed you can use a generic color PostScript printer driver However generic drivers do not have information on the printer s page sizes and image areas and images may be clipped or shifted when printed Using a standard Letter or A4 size media selection should produce acceptable results Contact the application s vendor or call Tektronix Customer Support in the U S and Canada at 1 800 835 6100 for printing information Outside the U S and Canada contact your local Tektronix reseller Tektronix 7 PRINTING FROM UNIX AND VMS WORKSTATIONS Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer OVERVIEW Overview You can send print files from your workstation to a Phaser 600 printer as you would to any PostScript printer for example an Apple LaserWriter Workstation users can print from any application that generates PostScript Level 1 or Level 2 output For more information on printing from a workstation request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL the Tektronix automated fax systems Refer to Using the automated fax systems for instructions on using these systems OVERVIEW To use the TekColor color corrections and other printer features use one or more of the following methods PhaserPrint software for UNIX workstations functions like a printer dr
132. ds to print a copy of the printer s startup page without turning the printer off and on NOTE sy v If the printer detects a non fatal failure it automatically prints a startup page containing diagnostic information regardless of the startup page setting There are several ways to print the startup page EI Printing the startup page from the front panel m Printing the startup page with a downloadable utility file m Printing the startup page with PhaserLink software 1 PRINTING THE STARTUP PAGE Printing the startup page from the front panel While the Ready message is displayed press the Menu button The printer displays the first item in the menu Help Pages Z Menu Press the Menu button to access the Help Pages The following message appears Menu Map lt gt Print Press the left arrow lt or right arrow gt buttons until the following message appears Startup Page lt gt Print Press the Print button to print a startup page PRINTING THE STARTUP PAGE Printing the startup page with a downloadable utility file Use one of the following methods to download a utility file to the printer to print the startup page E Macintosh utility file Print Start Page m PC utility file PRNTSTPG PS PRINTING THE STARTUP PAGE Macintosh utility file Print Start Page NOTE sy v If you are using QuickDraw GX you can use the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX driver to print a co
133. e colors you want PhaserMatch application For creating custom color profiles Special printing features that make your job easier a Reprint accessible from the printer s front panel allows you to reprint a previously printed PostScript image at a different scale and copy count Available with the Extended Features option Print Preview is a driver selectable option that lets you preview an image by printing it at a reduced scale which takes less time and media than printing a full scale image Available with the Extended Features option Easy to connect Bi directional parallel port with plug and play support PhaserShare cards provide optional network interfaces for the following m Ethernet EtherTalk Novell NetWare and TCP IP m Token Ring TokenTalk Novell NetWare and TCP IP m Locallalk and serial PhaserLink software printer control and information access PhaserLink software provides a breakthrough in printer control and information access Rather than use vendor proprietary printer specific and platform specific management utilities PhaserLink software provides this function using HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol the basis for World Wide Web browsers This allows you to use a standard web browser to view printer status control printer configuration and link to online documentation via the World Wide Web T E sy v To use PhaserLink software the printer must be connected to a netwo
134. e harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures FCC CLASs B DEVICE FOR 100 120 VAC EQUIPMENT Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help A RNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tektronix can affect emission compliance and could void the user s authority to operate this product To ensure emission compliance use shielded interface cables MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS Material Safety Data Sheets Proper management of environmental resources protects the well being of our employees customers shareholders and the communities we are a part of worldwide Tektronix establishes and maintains sound environmental management practices to accomplish this goal and to assure compliance with the laws regulations and orders of the responsible governmental authorities wherever Tektronix and its subsidiaries operate Tektronix Incorporated is complying with government regulations by providing Material Safety Data Sheets for this product Color Printing and Imaging Division Tektronix Incorporated MATERIAL SAFE
135. e paper Target match SWOP Press SWOP soy publication Specification for Web Offset Publications These are specifications for color separation films and color proofing that are used to ensure the consistency of printed colors between different publications This option is typically used inthe U S and is characterized to match 3M Matchprint 3 publication proofs m Used for high volume web press printing COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Commercial Press Press option Inks Base paper Target match Commercial Press commercial commercial m This option is typically used in the U S and is characterized to match 3M Matchprint 3 commercial proofs Used for high quality sheet fed printing COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Euroscale Press Press option Inks Base paper Target match Euroscale Press Euroscale publication a This option is typically used in Europe and is characterized to match the equivalent 3M Matchprint 3 proof SNAP Press Press option COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Base paper Target match SNAP Press newsprint Specifications for Non Heat Advertising Printing This is a set of production standards for printing on uncoated and newsprint papers m This option is targeted to match typical colors for this type of printing in the U S m Use this option if you are previewing work for a non heat web offset pr
136. e Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the color sampler chart file from the list then click Open The color sampler chart files were installed in the Samplers folder inside the PhaserTools folder At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH 6 Select colors within an application using the colors on the chart 7 Printyour document using one of the following methods If you are printing from a supported driver Print your document using a supported printer driver Such as the Phaser 600 GX or LaserWriter 8 x with the same color correction option selected in the driver that you used with a downloaded utility file or on the printer s front panel to print the chart Any other color correction selection in the driver can cause the colors to print differently If you are not using a supported driver Print your document with the same downloaded utility file or front panel color correction you used to print the chart Any other color correction selection can cause the colors to print differently PRINTING FROM A PC Printing from a PC Click on the following topics for more information Installing the f
137. e PostScript Level 2 programming language and in a few cases you may have to edit the files to change the default parameters OBTAINING THE PC UTILITY FILES Obtaining the PC utility files There are several ways to access the utility files m Using the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM Downloading files from the Tektronix World Wide Web site EI Downloading files from the Tektronix ftp server OBTAINING THE PC UTILITY FILES Using the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM Many workstations with newer operating systems can automatically mount a CD ROM Insert the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM into your CD ROM drive the icon for the CD ROM should be visible on the screen If you dont see an icon for the CD ROM on the screen you must mount the CD ROM using the proper mount command Check with your system administrator or man pages for instructions on the proper command for your system USING THE UTILITY FILES Using the utility files You can use the printer s utility files to perform the following procedures Download these files to the printer as you would any PostScript files Print quality modes Color corrections Printing the Color Sampler Charts Printing a font sampler from a PC Using a PostScript error handler Using the Tektronix halftone screens Printing the startup page Enabling and disabling the startup page Printing the configuration page USING THE UTILITY FILES Changing the printer s name Enabling and
138. e Tektronix printer driver for Windows 3 1 109 Using the Adobe PostScript driver for Windows 3 1 115 Using the Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 PostScript driver 118 Using the Windows NT 4 0 PostScript driver 119 Printing from a Macintosh 124 Print features quick reference Macintosh printer drivers 125 Using the Phaser 600 driver 138 Using the Adobe PSPrinter driver 139 Using the Apple LaserWriter 8 x driver 140 Using the Phaser 600 GX driver 141 Printing from a workstation 143 Overview 143 UNIX workstations 145 VMS workstations 147 For more information 148 Printing from specific applications 149 General hints and tips 149 Selecting print features 150 PRINTING BEYOND THE BASICS 193 Methods of selection 151 Print quality modes 154 Color corrections 155 All about media 157 Selecting media by size 157 Margins and print area 158 Page size print area and margins 161 Working with color 195 Color corrections making the best selection 197 Deciding which color correction to use 200 Color correction descriptions 201 Special considerations 215 Printing and using the color sampler charts 219 Special printing features 221 Media attributes 169 Fusing Mode Media Fusing 222 Image orientation 173 Advance Media 224 Page Rotation 174 Cut Media 226 Manual Feed using cut sheet media 176 Mirror Print 228 Image manipulation 179 Page Centering 229 Printer languages PostScript HP GL 181 Page Rotation 230 Fonts 182 Image Smoothing
139. e all but the bottom ink sticks from the loader Set the ink sticks aside for later use Close the cover ee CLEARING AN INK JAM 3 Remove the screw that holds the ink loader to the printer 9480 130 4 Slide the ink loader out of the printer 9480 126 CLEARING AN INK JAM With the ink loader out of the way use tweezers to remove the remaining ink sticks from inside the printer Reattach the ink loader and load the ink Turn the printer off and back on again After the 9480 127 printer initializes and warms up the front panel displays Ready Tektronix W4 USING THE FRONT PANEL Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer The printer has several Help Pages that you can print to learn more about the printer Click on the following topics for more information Front panel Help Pages overview Printing the front panel menu map Printing the configuration page Printing the startup page Enabling and disabling the startup page Enabling and disabling front panel menus FRONT PANEL Front panel Click on the following topics for details on parts of the front panel Front panel overview Front panel indicators Front panel buttons Two line display Printer information Front panel menu map Pause menu FRONT PANEL Front panel overview The front panel provides information with these features Two indicator lights Four buttons A display of two lines of 24 characters each for messages bu
140. e media a specified distance only after the last page of a job is printed After Each Page Advances the media a specified distance after each page printed To change the distance or amount the media is advanced use the PostScript utility file shipped on the printers CD ROM or diskettes USING THE PLUG IN Cut media m Select from the options in the pop up menu m This feature is for use with roll media only Never No cut is made after prints are finished After Each Job The media is cut only after an entire job is printed After Each Page The media is cut after each page is printed This is the default mode USING THE PLUG IN Page rotation Select from the options in the pop up menu This option rotates the page or image on the media by the amount specified m 90 Degrees Rotates the image left or counter clockwise by 90 degrees 180 Degrees Rotates the image left or counter clockwise by 180 degrees The image is turned up side down 270 Degrees Rotates the image left or counter clockwise by 270 degrees None The image is not rotated This is the default selection USING THE PLUG IN Rendering intent m This option is available in the following cases m If the Mode in Photoshop is RGB and you select Calibrated RGB as the Color Correction in PhaserPrint m If the Mode in Photoshop is Lab Select from the options in the pop up menu See Using the color rendering intents for details
141. e of the following methods to send the PSTEST PS file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager m Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any utility file SETTING DEFAULT HP GL PEN COLORS Setting default HP GL pen colors Use the HPGLPENS PS file to change the color and width of the default pen colors The HP 7475A plotter actually has only six pens but the printer s emulation supports up to 256 pens HP GL pen settings cannot be made persistent across printer power cycles pen settings revert to the default when the printer is turned off To restore your pen settings you must download your edited HPGLPENS PS file to the printer whenever the printer has been turned off or reset The pen color change is persistent across jobs but not across printer power cycles it affects all HP GL jobs that immediately follow it until the next printer reset NOTE AT 4 Vv The HPGLPENS PS file affects printer operation If the printer is shared on a network using this file may affect the prints requested from other users SETTING DEFAULT HP GL PEN COLORS In the HPGLPENS PS file pen number pen width red value green value and blue value are listed in parentheses after ColorSetup as shown below ColorSetup pen_number width red_value green_value blue _ value In the following example all pen
142. e resilient than with cold fusing When using roll media hot fusing overrides the Advance Media option and adds 225 mm 8 875 inches of blank media after each page is printed if cutting is disabled None Off With fusing turned off printing completes more quickly also possible banding and offsetting from the fuser are eliminated However prints may look lighter than when hot or cold fused with more white paper visible around the printed dots of color Inks may be less durable if they are not fused SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Hints When Hot is selected the only available option for Advance Media is Allow Hot Fusing Refer to Advance Media for more information Media fusing behaves differently with different media types some media may produce degraded print quality with fusing Experiment until you get the best results Tektronix supplied media usually look best with cold fusing When hot fusing is selected or de selected the printer goes into a warm up or cool down period for approximately 15 minutes If hot fusing has been selected the printer s warm up time also increases when the printer is turned on or comes out of standby mode If you do not have a supported printer driver you can use the PostScript utility files shipped on the printer s CD ROM or diskettes Refer to Downloading files to the printer for instructions on downloading utility files SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Advance Media This opti
143. each of the feed rollers Using your hand rotate each roller to clean its entire surface Wipe each of the paper guides gently UTION If you press too hard on the paper guides they can become detached to avoid this use your free hand to support the guide as you clean it with the other If a guide dies become detached carefully snap it back into place QUICK CLEANING Transport rollers Clean the transport rollers after every 80 E size 34 x 44 in sheets of media approximately 100 m 300 ft of 36 inch wide roll media or if you observe vertical offset in your prints Removing the media roll Lift the top cover latch on the upper right side of the printer Open the paper roll cover Remove the media roll 9480 80 QUICK CLEANING Cleaning the transport rollers To open the exit cover push the latch a on the lower right side of the printer DOWN while holding the exit cover handle b slowly rotate the cover down WARNING When lowering the exit cover be careful not to pinch your hand between the paper roll cover and the exit cover 9480 116 Using a lint free cloth that has been moistened with isopropyl alcohol or a pre soaked alcohol cloth gently wipe each of the transport rollers to remove any dust or residue Rotate each roller to make sure that you clean its entire surface QUICK CLEANING Drum Clean the drum after every 80 E size 34 x 44 in sheets of media which is a
144. eader information with each print job Click the Send Header Now button to save the PostScript header information in the printer then select the Assume header is downloaded and retained option This option makes print files a little smaller and faster than the first option but you need to click the Send Header Now button every time the printer is turned off or reset Click the Advanced button to see more options Select Use PostScript Level 2 features For faster printing select Binary communications protocol under Data format To ensure job integrity select Send Ctrl D before and after a job Click OK when finished PRINTING FROM A PC m Under PostScript Timeout values leave Job Timeout set to 0 Set WaitTimeout to the default 240 4 minutes Setting it higher ensures that you will not lose a multi page job due to a timeout after the Transmission Retry alert message is displayed PRINTING FROM A PC Using the Tektronix printer driver for Windows 3 1 To select printing options follow these steps From the Control Panel double click the Printers icon In the Printers dialog box choose your printer from the list of installed printers Click the Set As Default Printer button if you want to select your printer as the default Click the Connect button the Connect dialog box appears PRINTING FROM A PC Select the port to which your printer is connected The printer s configuration page contains the information
145. ect the Use image color matching option then click the Choose image color matching method button In the Image Color Matching dialog box select Perform image color matching on the host and click OK USING HOST COLOR CORRECTION IN WINDOWS 95 Click the Device Options tab to see the following options Highlight Color Correction in the Printer features field Select None in the Change setting for Color Correction field Click OK when finished Tektronix W4 USING PANTONE COLOR FILES Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer PANTONE OVERVIEW Pantone overview NOTE vy Vv For the latest information on color libraries call Tektronix Customer Support in the U S and Canada at 1 800 835 6100 Outside the U S and Canada contact your local Tektronix reseller The Pantone files for your printer include color library files for use with specific applications and a PANTONE Color sampler chart Click on the following topics for more information EI Installing Pantone files m Using the PANTONE Color templates EI Printing the PANTONE Color sampler chart m Printing Pantone Colors from an application INSTALLING PANTONE FILES Installing Pantone files m Installing the Macintosh files m Installing the PC files INSTALLING PANTONE FILES Installing the Macintosh files The PANTONE Color files are available on the printer s CD ROM 1 From the printer s CD ROM use the Installer app
146. ectangle USING THE PLUG IN Image size m his field reflects the dimensions in inches or millimeters of the image m If the value in the Scale box is out of range the image dimensions are displayed with question marks USING THE PLUG IN Image separation This option is only available if the Replicate images box is checked Type in an amount in inches or millimeters to specify the amount of separation between each replicated image A larger amount reduces the number of images that can be printed at one time The minimum allowed separation value is 0 inches The maximum separation value is 4 inches or 100 mm The default separation value is 0 125 one eighth inches or 3 175 mm Valid characters for this field are 0 to 9 and a period or decimal point USING THE PLUG IN As you type in a value the stylized representation of the page and the Number of images and Image layout values are dynamically updated If the value entered in the Image separation field is out of range the values in these other fields are replaced by question marks and no images are shown in the stylized representation of the page If the value is out of range and you click the Print or Save button the following alert is displayed The value for Image separation is out of range It will be replaced with the closest allowed value USING THE PLUG IN Number of images This field displays the number of scaled images that w
147. ection can cause the colors to print differently Tektronix Z COLOR MATCHING Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer SELECT YOUR COMPUTER TYPE Select your computer type Click on the following topics for more information m Using ColorSync on a Macintosh m Using host color correction in Windows 95 USING COLORSYNC ON A MACINTOSH Using ColorSync on a Macintosh ColorSync 2 0 is a color matching system that attempts to match the screen s colors to the printer s colors The software for the Phaser 600 printer includes a printer profile that contains specific color information required by ColorSync ColorSync adjusts an image s colors on the computer The TekColor color corrections adjust an image s colors in the printer You should use only one method of color adjusting at a time or you may get unexpected results For more information on color matching options see Color corrections making the best selection USING COLORSYNC ON A MACINTOSH To use ColorSync color matching you need to do the following 1 Use the installer application on the printers CD ROM to install the printer s software see Macintosh software for instructions Either select Easy Install or in the Custom Install window select the following items a Either the Adobe PSPrinter Driver or the LaserWriter 8 x Driver m The Printer Descriptions option m The ColorSync Profile option Set up the driver a Open the Chooser fro
148. ed Use these selections to override the settings on the printer s front panel From the printer s front panel Use these settings only when printing from a non supported driver Using PhaserLink software If your network is running TCP IP and you have a World Wide Web browser you can use this browser to view printer status and select printer features Refer to the PhaserShare Status Software User Manual for complete information Sending a PostScript utility file to the printer Use these settings only when printing from a non supported driver You can find detailed information in Using Printer Utilities and the Phaser 600 printer s web page http www tek com Color_Printers userdoc introduction html SELECTING PRINT FEATURES Print features quick reference front panel Feature Feature Front Panel descriptions Print quality modes See Printer Defaults Menu Standard Print qualit modes Print Quality Menu m Enhanced Ledeni Color correction See Printer Defaults Menu None Color Vivid Color corrections Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Monochrome TekColor Correction Menu Media size See Media Defaults Menu a ANSI Bs C D E Selecting media ISO A3 A2 A1 AO by size a JIS B1 B2 B3 BA m Architectural B C D E m 30 x 42 in Factory default setting Available only with the Extended Features option Media Size Menu SELECTING PRINT
149. ektronix anonymous ftp site on the Internet at ftp tek com Download utility files from the Tektronix Bulletin Board Service BBS refer to If you need help for information Access the Tektronix World Wide Web server on the Internet http www tek com Color_Printers Home page ftp ftp tek com bbs lt platform gt 600Utility files Access sample scripts that are available on line refer to If you need help for information WORKSTATION SOFTWARE PhaserPrint software for UNIX demo Optional PhaserPrint for UNIX software provides Driver selectable printer options a Fast raster file printing to Tektronix color printers m Fast screen copy printing to Tektronix color printers Note The printers CD ROM contains a demonstration copy of the PhaserPrint for UNIX software and an on line instruction guide in the UNIXDEMO directory For order information refer to PhaserPrint Tektronix W4 PRINTING BASICS Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer PRINTING OVERVIEW Printing overview You can print to your printer from Windows based PCs personal computers Macintosh computers and workstations Make sure that your printer is set up with the appropriate interface port refer to Connecting the printer If you havent already installed the printer s software refer to Software installation for instructions before continuing Refer to the following topics for specific information m 8 Printing from a PC Pri
150. els appear in the front panel display above each corresponding button You see this message Help Pages lt gt Menu Pressing the left arrow button lt scrolls backward through the selections pressing the right arrow button gt scrolls forward through the selections pressing Menu enters the currently displayed menu Using the left lt or right gt arrow buttons scroll through the selections until you see this message Language Z gt Menu SELECTING A LANGUAGE FOR THE FRONT PANEL Press the Menu button to enter the language selection menu You see this message Language English lt gt Select where the asterisk indicates the currently selected language Press the right arrow button until the display shows the language you want from these selections Language English Language Espanol Language Frangais Language Deutsch Language Italiano Language Japanese 5 Press Select to choose the language Press the 4 button until Ready is displayed in the selected language INSTALLING THE STARTER PAPER ROLL Installing the starter paper roll Click on the following instructions for loading the starter paper roll Ea Loading the paper roll m Feeding roll paper INSTALLING THE STARTER PAPER ROLL Loading the paper roll Open the paper roll cover Lift the paper roll holder out of the printer Notice that each end of the holder is unique a The left side
151. environments Network connections such as Ethernet offer significant speed improvements compared to the standard parallel communication connection Several varieties of PhaserShare cards allow the printer to be seamlessly integrated into popular network configurations All ports and protocols are simultaneously active allowing the printer to be used in mixed environments EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM Phaser Copystation The Phaser Copystation adds easy to use walk up color copying capability to the Phaser 600 Color Printer Especially useful is the ability to scan a small for example A size image and print the image with the Scale to Fit function on the printer Scale to Fit automatically scales an image to fit the media installed or selected as the default For more information refer to Phaser Copystation For detailed instructions on connecting and operating the Phaser Copystation refer to the Phaser CopyStation User Manual NOTE SE To order a Phaser Copystation use Tektronix order number 4540 EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM PhaserPrint For printing in UNIX environments Tektronix offers PhaserPrint software PhaserPrint software provides fast raster file and screen copy printing to Tektronix color printers PhaserPrint software also provides a graphical user interface for push button control of Tektronix printer features PhaserPrint software works with the workstation s native spooling system to print Post
152. er 1 Locate the FONTS PS file in the SAMPLERS directory either on the printer s CD ROM or the Printer Software for Windows diskette Copy the FONTS PS file to your computer s hard disk or use the file directly from the CD ROM Use one of the following methods to send the FONTS PS file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file Tektronix 7 PRINTING BEYOND THE BASICS Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer This chapter discusses the following topics Working with color Color corrections making the best selection Printing and using the color sampler charts Special printing features Phaser Copystation Laminating your Phaser 600 prints Working with color Whether you are producing color graphs charts transparencies for presentations posters signage or design comps there are a few things to keep in mind when using color m A large area of color looks more saturated brighter than a small area of the same color A color looks brighter against a dark background than it does against a white background Colors look different due to the background color or to the surrounding colors The appearance of a color varies with the type and amount of light for example fluorescent lighting versus sunlight
153. er inside the PhaserTools folder POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or tyoe anew name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue Resend the file to get information from the PostScript error handler POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS Using the PC and workstation error handler utility file 1 Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the utility files from either the Phaser 600 CD ROM or the Printer Software for Windows diskette Locate the installed files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory on your hard disk Send the TEKEHAND PS file to the printer using one of the following methods m PC users Use the DOS COPY command or the Copy command in Windows 3 1 File Manager to send the file to the printer See Downloading files from a PC or World Wide Web topics for instructions m Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS Fixing timeout problems in Windows Try one of the following procedures to correct Windows timeout problems Ifa Windows procedure doesn t work for you try the DOS procedure Click on the following topics for more information m From Windows 3 1
154. erLink software Tektronix online control of printer features and access to printer information through a standard web browser The Extended Features upgrade is especially suited for workgroups enhancing the printer s performance in the following ways EI Z600FX Adds 22 Roman fonts for a total of 39 fonts Z600FJ Adds 2 Kanji fonts for a total of 17 Roman 2 Kanji fonts Provides the Reprint feature that allows you to reprint a previously printed image at a different scale and copy count Provides the Print Preview feature that lets you preview an image by printing it at a reduced scale which takes less time and media than printing a full scale image Adds support for the Phaser Copystation EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM NOTE sy If you are not sure which printer configuration you have press and hold down the O button on the printer s front panel Printer information appears on the lower line of the display To order the Extended Features upgrade for a Phaser 600 printer use Tektronix order number Z600FX Roman fonts or Z600FJ Kanji fonts EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM Memory upgrade The Phaser 600 printer has 8 Mbytes of standard memory You can upgrade the printer s memory with either a 16 Mbyte SIMM or a 32 Mbyte SIMM for a total of 24 Mbytes or 40 Mbytes respectively NOTE ax 4 v If you are not sure how much memory your printer has press and hold down the O button on the printer s front p
155. erWriter Utility Also if you are using QuickDraw GX you can download printer utilities from the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX printer driver Click on the following topics for more information m Using the LaserWriter Utility to download files m Using the LaserWriter Utility to perform other tasks m Downloading files from the Phaser 600 GX driver DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Using the LaserWriter Utility to download files The LaserWriter Utility is an Apple utility program you use on the Macintosh to send PostScript files and fonts to the printer e LaserWriter Utility The LaserWriter Utility version 7 7 is compatible with Apple System Software versions 7 0 and later Itis also compatible with QuickDraw GX If you are using System Software 6 x check with the Tektronix BBS for another version of the LaserWriter Utility in the LW_UTIL SEA compressed archive file Refer to If you need help for instructions on using the on line services NOTE ax 4 v The LaserWriter Utility cannot be used if the printer is connected to a print server See your system administrator to temporarily remove the printer from the print server to download necessary files DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER See Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printer s CD ROM to install the printer s software Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk an
156. ered the menu in the front panel Exit the menu Power indicator is off The printer is not ready is disabled or has detected an error Read the front panel message to determine the printer s status The power switch on the printer is off or the power cord is not connected Check that the power cord is plugged into the printer and into an active Circuit check that the power switch is set to on Error indicator is blinking The printer is stopped because it detected a user correctable error Such as an open door or a media jam Correct the condition reported by the front panel e g close the door or clear the media jam Error occurred that is not user correctable Turn the printer off and back on again If the indicator is still on after the power up sequence the printer requires service See If you need help SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Troubleshooting quick reference cont d Symptom Possible Causes Solution The front panel menu Front panel timeout if no Press Menu to enter the front panel exits and returns to activity occurs in 5 minutes menu Ready without anyone the front panel returns to pressing the 5 Ready button Front panel reports Media jam Remove the jammed media See Clearing a media jam Clear lt Location gt Jam Media is too thick or too thin Use recommended media Refer to All about media for more information Using Letter size cut sheet
157. ers Folder double click the Add Printer icon 2 From the Add Printer menu follow the Add Printer Wizard instructions until the Manufacturers Printers window appears Click on Have Disk 3 In the Install From Disk dialog box do the following a Click Browse b In the Open dialog box select the Drive for the printer s CD ROM c Select the WIN95_NT directory under Folders click OK 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 4 0 cont d 4 Select your printer from the list that appears then click Next Tektronix Phaser 600 standard configuration Tektronix Phaser 600 Extended Features Extended Features option Note Press and hold down the printer s button on the front panel for configuration information Select the appropriate settings in Add Printer Wizard then click Finish Inthe Files Needed dialog box click Browse and locate the printers CD ROM or installation diskette click OK Select the appropriate settings in Add Printer Wizard then click Finish Inthe Files Needed dialog box click Browse and locate the printers CD ROM or installation diskette click OK When you are returned to the Properties dialog box fill in the other fields as desired then click OK PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 4 0 To add or update the driver on a Windows NT 4 0 Server or Workstation 4 The Windows NT driver does not suppor
158. ers remain unavailable for use until QuickDraw GX is re enabled NOTE sy v During installation QuickDraw GX altered the Fonts folder inside your System Folder If you disable QuickDraw GX you may need to reinstall some fonts DISABLING QUICKDRAW GX Method 2 1 Select Extensions Manager in the Control Panel 2 Click to disable all QuickDraw GX entries such as QuickDraw GX and QuickDraw Helper 3 Select Restart from the Special menu Any desktop printers created before you disabled QuickDraw GX will have an X drawn through their icons These desktop printers remain unavailable for use until QuickDraw GX is re enabled NOTE sy v During installation QuickDraw GX altered the Fonts folder inside your System Folder If you disable QuickDraw GX you may need to reinstall some fonts Tektronix W4 PRINTING FROM DOS Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer Click on the following topics for more information g Setting up ports m Printing from DOS SETTING UP PORTS Setting up ports Click on the following topics for more information m Setting up the parallel port m Setting up optional interface ports SETTING UP PORTS Setting up the parallel port If you are using the printer s parallel port disable timeouts on your computer s parallel port to make sure that large files will print even if data transmission is slow Use the DOS MODE command to disable timeouts on your computer s paral
159. essure Take up spool 37 inches 940 mm wide 6 8 inches 173 mm outside diameter 195 F 90 5 C Ambient 0 65 inches 16 5 mm per second Minimum setting for best print quality Requires release liner take up spool LAMINATING YOUR PHASER 600 PRINTS Tips on laminating prints Use Tektronix Smooth White Bond or Photo Grade Presentation papers and Tektronix Lamination Film for best results Refer to Ordering printer supplies for ordering information If the laminator is equipped with cooling fans use them to reduce the possibility of curled prints Set the laminator s nip pressure low enough to avoid ink smear and possible damage to laminator pressure rollers For best results set the printer s fusing mode to Cold when prints are to be laminated Lamination of canvas material is not recommended Tektronix 7 PRINTING THE COLOR SAMPLER CHARTS Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer There are color sampler charts available for your printer The charts are designed to help you select colors within an application that can be reproduced on your printer Tektronix RGB Color Sampler 9480 137 Each color sampler chart consists of colored rectangles with the component values for each color You can select colors within an application using the component values Component values are percentages of colors cyan magenta yellow and black red green and blue hue saturation and b
160. f installed printers 3 Click the Connect button the Connect dialog box appears 4 Change your port connection from LPTx to LPTx DOS where xis 1 2 or 3 5 Click OK Refer to Fixing timeout problems in Windows for instructions on fixing timeout problems in Windows SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution If you can t print Windows 95 from Windows to an LPT port cont d In the menu that appears select Settings 1 Select Start in the taskbar on your screen In the next menu select Printers the Printers window appears Click on your printer s icon and select Properties from the File menu Click the Details tab Click Add Port Click Other Make sure that Local Port is highlighted then click OK 9 Type LPTx DOS where x is 1 2 or 3 10 Click OK 11 In the Details tab the Print to the following port should be LPT DOS unknown local port SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution If you can t print from Windows to an LPT port cont d Check the printer s language mode 1 Print a copy of the printer s configuration page to see the language mode on each port Refer to Printing the configuration page 2 If the printer port you are using has the wrong language set for the type of application you are using send one of the following utility files to the printer m To print PostS
161. f seconds Windows waits before notifying you that a printer is off line The default is 15 seconds Transmission Retry On large or multiple page documents you may see an Alert message that the printer is no longer accepting data before the job is completely sent to the printer When using a shared printer you should set this option to a larger value such as 900 seconds 15 minutes to avoid these unnecessary timeouts Type a value between 45 and 999 in this text box the default setting is 45 seconds PRINTING FROM A PC Click the Paper tab to see media options such as media sizes and media source use manual feed for cut sheet Click the Graphics tab to see graphics options TE NE If you are using host color correction you need to make selections in the Graphics and Device Options tabs Refer to Color Matching for more information on host color correction Click the Device Options tab to see printer specific options such as color corrections PRINTING FROM A PC m Click the PostScript tab to see PostScript related options a The PostScript header contains important PostScript information that must accompany each print job it is not a banner page printed with each job If an option is not selected an error message is displayed on your computer screen and your job does not print Click one of the following in the PostScript header field Select Download header with each print job This option downloads PostScript h
162. fect the prints of all users sharing the printer on a network A system administrator may want to disable the menus so users can only select printing features such as color corrections through their applications on an individual basis In the protected mode users still have access to print the Test Print Configuration and Startup pages as well as printer information NOTE sy v If you have used the Menu Short MENUSHRT PS file to disable the front panel menus you can temporarily re enable the menus by holding down the printer s front panel Menu button while pressing the button You can scroll through the menus as usual however when you press the button again the front panel returns to the shortened form ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT PANEL MENUS To enable or disable the front panel menus use one of these methods EI Macintosh utility file Menu Short Menu Long m PC utility file MENUSHRI PS MENULONG PS ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT PANEL MENUS Macintosh utility file Menu Short Menu Long Install the utility files from the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM see Macintosh software for instructions Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select one of the following files from the list then click Open These files were
163. fferent computer Use different cabling SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution Printer not Macintosh users printing even though you ve configured a supported driver for your printer m Open the Chooser and select a supported driver such as the LaserWriter 8 x and your printer If the driver isn t installed or properly set up with your printer refer to Macintosh software for instructions cont d Make sure that Background Printing is turned off If you are having trouble printing from the Finder in System 7 1 for example if the Phaser 600 printer driver dialog boxes are not opening it may be because the Finder doesn t have enough allocated memory Reinstall a supported driver to automatically allocate enough memory for printing from the Finder For PowerMacs you should be using the latest version of Open Transport and the system software available from Apple Computer If you are using LaserWriter 8 throw away the LaserWriter 8 Preffile located in the Preferences folder inside the System Folder A new preferences file will be generated Use the most current version of the Macintosh operating system Use the most current version of your application If you prefer using background printing but it seems to be causing problems allocate more memory to the Print Monitor SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution
164. files you need Other printer utility files Click here for descriptions Macintosh utility file PC utility file Color corrections making the Commercial Press COMBCIAL PS best selection Euroscale Press EUROSCAL PS Monochrome MONOCHRM PS No Color Correction NOCORECT PS Simulate Display DISPLAY PS SNAP Press SNAPRESS PS SWOP Press SWOPRESS PS Vivid Color VIVDCOLR PS Print quality modes Enhanced Quality ENHANCED PS Standard Quality STANDARD PS OTHER UTILITIES Other printer utility files Click here for descriptions Macintosh utility file PC utility file Image Smoothing Image Smoothing Off Image Smoothing On SMOTHOFF PS SMOOTHON PS Cut Media Cut Media After Each Job Cut Media After Each Page Cut Media Never Cut Media Now CUTJOB PS CUTPAGE PS CUTNEVER PS CUTNOW PS Fusing Mode Media Fusing Fusing Cold Fusing Hot Fusing None FUSECOLD PS FUSEHOT PS FUSENONE PS Mirror Print Mirror Print Off Mirror Print On MIROROFF PS MIRRORON PS Page Rotation Page Rotation None Page Rotation 90 Page Rotation 180 Page Rotation 270 ROTATENO PS ROTATE90 PS ROTAT180 PS ROTAT270 PS OTHER UTILITIES The following utility files are described in other locations m Using a PostScript error handler Printing the startup page Printing the configuration page Formatting a SCSI hard disk Initializing a formatted SCSI hard disk Enabling and disabling
165. fore the job is completely sent to the printer When using a shared printer you should set this option to a larger value such as 900 seconds 15 minutes to avoid these unnecessary timeouts Type a value between 45 and 999 in this text box the default setting is 45 seconds PRINTING FROM A PC m Click the Paper tab to see media options such as media sizes and media source use manual feed for cut sheet media Click the Graphics tab to see graphics options NOTE ax 4 Vv Use the Print Quality selections in the Device Options tab instead of the Resolution Options in the Graphics tab Click the Device Options tab to see printer specific options such as color corrections for details PRINTING FROM A PC NOTE wy v If you are using host color correction you need to make selections in the Graphics and Device Options tabs Refer to Color Matching for more information on host color correction Click the Device Options tab to see printer specific options such as color corrections Click the PostScript tab to see PostScript related options a Ihe PostScript header contains important PostScript information that must accompany each print job it is not a banner page printed with each job If an option is not selected an error message is displayed on your computer screen and your job does not print Click one of the following in the PostScript header field Select Download header with each print job This option down
166. front panel menus Enabling and disabling SysStart Job execution Using the Tektronix halftone screens Changing the printer s language mode Bi directional status reporting Using simple color conversions Tektronix Z USING SCSI HARD DISKS Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer You can add a SCSI Small Computer System Interface hard disk to your printer to store optional fonts Click on the following topics for more information SCSI peripheral devices Selecting a SCSI hard disk Ordering information Connecting a SCSI hard disk Formatting a SCSI hard disk Initializing a formatted SCSI hard disk Enabling and disabling SysStart Job execution SCSI PERIPHERAL DEVICES SCSI peripheral devices The SCSI port is used for connecting these optional peripheral devices m Phaser Copystation To set up the Phaser Copystation and to connect it to your printer refer to Chapter 2 of the Phaser Copystation User Manual Refer to Phaser Copystation for ordering information External SCSI hard disk Storage for additional downloadable fonts You can connect one or more SCSI external hard disks to the printer for additional font storage When you download a font to an external disk the font remains there until you remove it SELECTING A SCSI HARD DISK selecting a SCSI hard disk NOTE sy v For additional information on SCSI hard disks request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL the Tektronix
167. g the PhaserPrint plug in for Photoshop Click on the following topics for more information Installing the plug in for Macintosh m Installing the plug in for Windows 1 INSTALLING THE PHASERPRINT PLUG IN FOR PHOTOSHOP Installing the plug in for Macintosh See Macintosh software to install the printers software m From the printers CD ROM or Printer Software Installer for Macintosh diskette select Easy Install to automatically install the printer s software Or From the printer s CD ROM select the PhaserPrint Photoshop Plug in in the Custom Install window The plug in is automatically installed in the Acquire Export folder inside the Plug ins folder in the Photoshop application folder on your computer s hard disk INSTALLING THE PHASERPRINT PLUG IN FOR PHOTOSHOP Installing the plug in for Windows Use the installer application on the printers CD ROM to install the PhaserPrint plug in 1 Insert the printers CD ROM into your computers CD ROM drive 2 Do one of the following depending on the version of Windows you are using Windows 95 and Windows NT 4 0 Windows 3 1 and Windows NT 3 51 1 Click the Start icon in the taskbar on your 1 In the Program Manager select Run from screen In the menu that appears click the File menu Run 2 Atthe Command Line type in the CD ROM In the Run window type in the CD ROM drive location and the PHOTOSHP drive location and the PHOTOSHP directory followed by the f
168. g the automated fax systems for instructions on using HAL and EuroHAL PRINTING FROM SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS Printing from specific applications For printing from most applications follow the instructions in Software installation to install drivers and printer software Some applications require additional configuration or page description files which may have been installed with the driver General hints and tips For printing hints and tips beyond the information provided in the application s manuals look for additional information in the following places World Wide Web If you have access to the Internet you can view selected topics on the Phaser 600 printer s web page Access the printer s documentation from this web address http www tek com Color_Printers userdoc introduction html HAL Request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL Tektronix automated fax systems Refer to Using the automated fax systems for instructions on using HAL and EuroHAL SELECTING PRINT FEATURES Selecting print features Click on the following topics for more information m Methods of selection Quick reference tables m Print features quick reference front panel a Printing from aPC a Printing from a Macintosh m Print quality modes m Color corrections SELECTING PRINT FEATURES Methods of selection This printer provides several ways to select print features Through a supported printer driver recommend
169. h utility files from the printer s CD ROM to install the printer s software Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Select Name Printer from the Utilities menu the currently selected printer is listed in the dialog box Type the new name in the edit box Click the Rename button At the confirmation dialog box click OK Open the Chooser to reselect the printer with its new name CHANGING THE PRINTER S NAME Changing the printer s name from a PC You can change the printer s AppleTalk name from a PC The printer s name has the following characteristics Is printed on the startup and configuration pages Is used by AppleTalk to identify the printer Can be up to 31 characters long and may contain any printable characters except at sign and colon A name change is persistent across printer power cycles CHANGING THE PRINTER S NAME See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files View the PRNTNAME PS file in a text editor Edit the file to substitute a different printer name for My Printer Name in the PrinterName line TE wy v Some text editors add a carriage return or line feed after the last Control D character in a file you are editing If your computer is connected to the printer through the parallel port or the optional seri
170. haserTools folder Manuals Printer Utilities Network Utilities PANTONE Files Acrobat Reader PDF files of the printer s manuals Printer utility files for controlling printer features Utility files for using the printer on a network PANTONE Color library files and sampler chart PhaserTools Manuals PhaserTools Printer Utilities Phaser Tools Network Utilities PhaserTools PANTONE Files Available only on the printer s CD ROM MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Installing printer software for Macintosh Note Use the installer application on the printers CD ROM or diskettes to install the printer s standard software Then continue with driver specific setup instructions for the driver you are using Insert either the printer s CD ROM or Macintosh diskette into the appropriate drive on your computer Double click the Phaser 600 Installer icon Click Continue until the Easy Install window appears Select Easy Install or Custom Install see Custom Install or Easy Install for the list of files in each Easy Install Click Install For details on each item click Read Me Custom Install Select Custom Install CD ROM only Select individual items to install Click the buttons for information on each item m Click Install when to install the selected items MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Setting up the Phaser 600 printer driver Note Phaser 600 driver is a Tektronix modified versi
171. he Print dialog box to see the TekColor Options dialog box Select printer specific options as desired PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Using the Adobe PSPrinter driver NOTE sy v Refer to the on line user guide on the printer s CD ROM for more information on using the Adobe PSPrinter driver From the File menu open the Page Setup dialog box Use the Paper pop up menu to select the printer s supported paper sizes From the File menu open the Print dialog box Select Manual Feed in the Paper Source field for cut sheet media In the Print dialog box click the Options button to see the Print Options dialog box There are printer specific features listed at the bottom of the dialog box PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Using the Apple LaserWriter 8 x driver From the File menu open the Page Setup dialog box Use the Paper pop up menu to select the printer s supported paper sizes From the File menu open the Print dialog box Select Manual Feed in the Paper Source field for cut sheet media In the Print dialog box click the Options button to see the Print Options dialog box There are printer specific features listed at bottom of the dialog box PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Using the Phaser 600 GX driver NOTE wy Vv Refer to Using the Phaser 600 GX Driver for details on using the Phaser 600 GX driver Printing with a desktop printer m lf you are using QuickDraw GX applications do one of the following m Select any deskto
172. he files on the diskette You can then copy the files to your hard disk or send the files to the printer using the Ip print command MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Manual diskette mounting instructions If the volume manager is not running you can manually mount the PC diskette You must have root privileges to use the mount command Type the following command mount F pcfs device special directory name For example mount F pcfs dev diskette floppy Or if the device name dev diskette ocfs pcfs no is in your etc vfstab directory type the following command to mount the diskette mount pcfs You can then copy the files to your hard disk or extract the file unix tar as described in Extracting files from unix tar To eject the diskette type eject NOTE vy v Do not execute the eject command from within the mount point the directory to which you mounted the diskette MOUNTING THE PC DOS DISKETTE ON A WORKSTATION Sun running SunOS 4 1 3 You must have root privileges to use the mount command Type the following command mount r t pcfs device name mount point For example mount r t pefs dev fd0c mnt You can then copy the files to your hard disk or extract the file unix tar as described in Extracting files from unix tar To eject the diskette type eject NOTE sy v Do not execute the eject command from within the mount point the directory to which you mounted the diskette
173. ia Defaults menu It is used only with roll media Options m Never Off The printer does not automatically cut the media This keeps the images together on the media roll which is useful for processes such as lamination After Each Job Per Job The printer automatically cuts the media only after the last page of a job is printed After Each Page Per Page default The printer automatically cuts the media after each page is printed SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Hints Certain media do not cut well or may require that the automatic internal cutter be replaced more frequently Because thick or fiber based media for instance artist s canvas can be difficult to cut you may want to turn off the automatic cutting The driver selection overrides the front panel default If you do not have a supported printer driver use the PostScript utility files shipped on the printer s CD ROM or diskettes Refer to Downloading files to the printer for instructions on downloading utility files SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Mirror Print This option is selected in supported printer drivers Mirror Print inverts an image left to right before printing Options o On m Off default Hints Mirror Print is useful when printing on transparency film so that the printed surface can be protected when mounted If you do not have a supported printer driver you can use the PostScript utility files shipped on the printer s CD ROM
174. ices are not listed in the options box install the TCP IP protocol on the server This is done from the Control Panel Network box Click on the Protocols tab and lick on Add Select TCP IP Protocol and click OK To apply these changes restart the Windows NT 4 0 server 6 Enter the printer s IP address in the box labeled Name or address of server providing Ipd 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 4 0 cont d Y 7 Inthe box marked Name of printer or print queue on that server enter PS for PostScript in uppercase then click OK 8 Click Close in the Printer Ports box 9 In the Add Printer Wizard dialog box click the box next to this new port then click Next 10 In the Add Printer Wizard dialog box click Have Disk to add a new Tektronix driver 11 Type in the path name CD ROM or diskette to the driver files then click OK 12 Select the printer model and click Next 13 If prompted that a driver is already installed for this printer select Replace existing driver then click Next Type in the printer s name any name you want Click the appropriate box to use this printer as the default Then click Next PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 4 0 cont d 4 15 Check one of the following options then click Next a Shared To share the printer on the network Click on all platforms that may use this printer No
175. idelines The printer can support up to six external disks or four disks and one Copystation You must turn on the disk s before you turn on the printer Wait at least one minute after turning on the disk s before turning on the printer Terminators m he printer must always be at one end of the chain with a terminator at the other end or a terminated device such as the Phaser Copystation a The printer has an internal terminator SCSI ID numbers a With multiple disks each disk must have a unique SCSI ID number Do not turn on the printer or disk until each disk has a unique number The printer s SCSI number is 7 and the internal disk is number 4 Valid ID numbers for the external disk are 0 1 2 3 5 and 6 CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK m Phaser Copystation If you have a Phaser Copystation connected to the printer it must be located at one end of the SCSI chain with the printer at the other end and the external disk s in the middle m The Copystation uses two SCSI ID addresses 5 and 6 therefore the external disk s can use ID numbers 0 through 3 If you set an external disk to SCSI ID address 5 or 6 you may see an error on the configuration or startup pages a Sys Start file a You may load a startup file called Sys Start onto your external disk The Sys Start job file is similar to an init file When you turn on the printer the file executes providing that Sys Start has been enabled through a c
176. ile name directory followed by the file name SETUP EXE SETUP EXE For example For example DAPHOTOSHP SETUP EXE DAPHOTOSHP SETUP EXE Click OK Click OK INSTALLING THE PHASERPRINT PLUG IN FOR PHOTOSHOP The Setup status dialog box appears followed by the Installer s introductory screen Click Next to continue In the Tektronix PhaserPrint Setup information dialog box click Next to install the files The Setup status dialog box appears while files are copied to your computer When setup is complete an Information dialog box appears Click OK to finish the installation USING THE PLUG IN Using the plug in Click on the following topics for more information m Starting the PhaserPrint plug in m Selecting options in the PhaserPrint dialog box USING THE PLUG IN Starting the PhaserPrint plug in 1 If you don t already have a Phaser 600 printer selected as the default printer do the following a Macintosh Open the Chooser and select a PostScript driver such as the Adobe PSPrinter and your Phaser 600 printer or select an appropriate QuickDraw GX desktop printer The PhaserPrint software works like a printer driver and prints to the printer you selected in the Chooser Windows Select your printer and port within the PhaserPrint software as described later in these instructions Open Photoshop and an image From the File menu highlight Export to see the pop up menu Select Phaser
177. iles Important preparations m Printing the color charts PRINTING FROM A PC Installing the files 1 Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the printer s software Select Easy Install to automatically install the software or select the Samplers item in the Custom Install Utilities window You can select color corrections from the printer s front panel However if you need to select color corrections with downloadable utility files also install the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window You may need to use utility files if the printer is some distance away from you or if you are not using one of the provided drivers Locate the files in the SAMPLERS subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application PRINTING FROM A PC Important preparations To match colors on the charts to colors selected within an application use the same printer color correction to print the charts that you are going to use when selecting and printing those colors within an application Printing from a supported driver 1 Print a color chart with either the Vivid Color front panel selection or the Vivid Color VIVDCOLR PS utility file downloaded to the printer 2 Print from an application with the driver s Vivid Color option selected Printing from a non supported driver 1 Print a color chart with either the Vivid Color front panel selecti
178. ill fit in the image area of the currently selected Media size and Landscape orientation options The Number of images reflects the current Image separation value If the Replicate images box is not checked this number is set to 1 If either of the Scale or Image separation values are out of range a question mark is displayed USING THE PLUG IN Image layout This field shows how the scaled images will fit horizontally and vertically in the image area of the currently selected Media and Landscape orientation options The Image layout reflects the current Image separation value If the Replicate images box is not checked this number is set to 1 x 1 If either of the Scale or Image separation values are out of range question marks are displayed USING THE PLUG IN Media size a This field reflects the dimensions in inches or millimeters of the selected media size USING THE PLUG IN Show color preview of image This option displays an approximate color image rather than a black box in the Stylized representation of the page field m This option is set to off each time you start the PhaserPrint plug in Tektronix 7 USING THE PHASER 600 GX DRIVER Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer If you are using Apple Macintosh QuickDraw GX use the Phaser 600 GX driver to print to your Phaser 600 printer The Phaser 600 GX driver works with QuickDraw GX and non QuickDraw GX applications Quic
179. index from library name To request a single file from a directory type send filename from library name To determine file size type send list of filename from library name USING THE AUTOMATED FAX SYSTEMS Using the automated fax systems As an alternative to using the Customer Support Hotline and to provide up to date information quickly Tektronix has set uo HAL and EuroHAL two interactive automated fax systems These automated fax systems provide Macintosh PC and workstation users with the latest technical hints and tips like color matching solutions to common technical problems and application notes like CorelDRAW and QuarkXPress You may call HAL or EuroHAL from anywhere in the world The fax systems are available 24 hours a day seven days a week Click on the following topics for more information m Use HAL in the U S A and Canada m Use EuroHAL in Europe USING THE AUTOMATED FAX SYSTEMS Use HAL in the U S A and Canada If you have a fax machine and a touch tone voice telephone you can order a HAL catalog listing all of the information offered by HAL NOTE wy v Before ordering documents from HAL order a catalog listing the numbers of available documents You may want to replace your catalog periodically since the system is often updated Before you call write down the area code and telephone number for your fax machine HAL will ask you to key this number through the keypad on your voice
180. information m Margins m U S Cut sheet media sizes m Metric Cut sheet media sizes ALL ABOUT MEDIA Margins Margins for U S and Metric cut sheet media Margins Leading Trailing Sides 22mm 8mm 5mm 9 in C33 In 2 in ALL ABOUT MEDIA U S Cut sheet media sizes U S Cut sheet media sizes Media Size Print area U S sizes ANSI A Oo x 11in 8 11 x 9 82 in ANSI B E 10 56 x 15 82 in ANSI C 17 X 22 iN 16 53 x 20 82 in ANSI D 22 x 34 in 21 55 x 32 82 in ANSI E 34 x 44 in 33 6 x 42 82 in ISO metric ISO A4 8 27 x 11 4 in 10 56 x 15 82 in ISO A3 ESAn 11 2 x 15 36 in ISO A2 16 5 x 23 4 in 16 1 x 22 21 in ISO A1 23 4 x 33 1 in PRANK 31 9 in a ISO AO 33 1 x 46 8 in 32 64 x 45 63 in Misc m 30 x 42 in 30 x 42 in 29 55 x 40 82 in Sizes not available in the front panel cannot be selected as the default media size U S Cut sheet media sizes cont d Media Size ALL ABOUT MEDIA Print area JIS metric JIS B4 10 13 x 14 3 in 9 7 x 13 15 in JIS B3 14 3 x 20 28 in 13 87 x 19 1 in JIS B2 20 28 x 28 67 in 19 8 x 27 49 in JIS B1 28 67 x 40 5 in 28 21 X S937 im Architectural Arch A 9x12in 8 5 x 10 8 in Arch B 12 0 x 18 0 in 11 5 x 16 8 in Arch C 18 x 24 in 170 X 22 8 iN a Arch D 24 x 36 in 23 57 X 34 82 in a Arch E
181. ing N O I Class 55 SECTION 15 REGULATORY INFORMATION TSCA All components of this material are listed on the TSCA Inventory CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 Not listed RCRA TCLP below hazardous waste levels set by EPA EPCRA SARA Not reportable MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS SECTION 16 OTHER INFORMATION Original preparation date 9 12 96 Prepared by Corporate Environmental Health and Safety JMP Tektronix Incorporated PO Bex 500 Mail Stop 46 840 Beaverton Oregon 97077 MSDS information 503 627 7255 SPECIFICATIONS Specifications Temperature Operating 15 C to 32 C 59 F to 90 F Best Print Quality 20 C to 25 C 68 F to 77 F Storage 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F Humidity Operating 10 to 80 Relative Humidity non condensing Best Print Quality 30 to 70 Relative Humidity non condensing Non operating 10 to 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Altitude Operating O to 2500 m 8 000 ft at 25 C Non operating O to 55 000 m 18 000 ft Primary voltage ranges 90 132 VAC 110 VAC nominal 180 264 VAC 220 VAC nominal Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz Primary fusing 110 VAC 10 Amps 220 VAC 5 0 Amps Not user accessible Power Consumption State Average power Continuous printing 800 W Idle 220 W Dimensions of standard unit Height 1038 mm 40 87 in With ink loader Depth 670 mm 26 39 in With output bin Width 1700 mm 66 93 in
182. ing message appears Startup Page lt gt ENABLING AND DISABLING THE STARTUP PAGE Press the Menu button to access the startup page settings Press the right arrow gt button once for the following message Startup Page Off lt gt Select Press the Select button to disable printing of the startup page To return to the top level of the menu press the 9 button until the printer displays the Ready message ENABLING AND DISABLING THE STARTUP PAGE Enabling and disabling the startup page witha downloadable utility file Use one of the following methods to download a utility file to the printer to enable or disable the startup page m Macintosh utility file LaserWriter Utility m PC utility file STARTPG PS NOSTRIPG PS ENABLING AND DISABLING THE STARTUP PAGE Macintosh utility file LaserWriter Utility Install the utility files from the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM see Macintosh software for instructions Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Set Startup Page from the Utilities menu Select either the on or off button then click OK 1 ENABLING AND DISABLING THE STARTUP PAGE PC utility file STARTPG PS NOSTRTPG PS Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the printer s software Select Easy Install to automatic
183. installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder m Use the Menu Short file to disable the printing features menus on the printer s front panel Use the Menu Long file to expand the printer s front panel to show all menus ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT PANEL MENUS At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type anew name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue 1 ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT PANEL MENUS PC utility file MENUSHRT PS MENULONG PS Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the printer s software Select Easy Install to automatically install the software or select the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Select one of the following files m Use the MENUSHAT PS file to disable the printing features menus on the printer s front panel Use the MENULONG PS file to expand the printer s front panel to show all menus Use one of the following methods to send the desired file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also
184. inter Setting up the printer Removing the transit restraint attaching the ink loader loading the ink installing the output bin attaching the Quick Reference Guide and if applicable installing the optional Phaser Copystation Connecting power and interface cables Changing the default language for the front panel if applicable Installing media Installing printer software on your computer Using the Printer Software diskettes or CD ROM to install the printer software drivers PPDs and utility files SETTING UP THE PRINTER setting up the printer What you get with your printer The printer and its accessories are shipped in a single box on a pallet If you ordered an optional Phaser Copystation it is shipped separately The following items are shipped with the printer 1 Quick Start Instructions 2 Starter roll of Tektronix Smooth White Bond paper Output bin Accessories box contents described on the next page 9480 02 Ink loader Allen wrench Accessories box contents 1 Phaser 600 Color Printer Quick Reference Guide Phaser 600 User Manual Phaser 600 CD ROM and diskettes Registration card and license agreement Optional PhaserShare manuals and diskettes Power cord Parallel adapter ColorStix ink sticks Supplies information sheet PhaserMatch manual Cleaning kit Fuser kit Media cutting knife SETTING UP THE PRINTER 9480 98 SETTING UP THE PRINTER Opt
185. inter s front panel light briefly Messages appear in the display panel LCD as the printer goes through a series of self tests Initializing g g 9480 12 CD 2 While initializing the printer makes various mechanical sounds the front panel displays this message as it performs an automatic head cleaning procedure Cleaning g g 9480 12 CD 3 The printer takes about 10 12 minutes to warm up and complete the self tests depending on the amount of memory installed CONNECTING THE PRINTER NOTE wy v The printer s memory includes a startup page that is disabled by default You can turn on the startup page using either the front panel menu or a software utility file provided on the CD ROM or World Wide Web Refer to Enabling and disabling the startup page for details When the printer is ready for operation When the power up sequence is complete the green indicator is on steady not blinking the red indicator is off and the front panel displays this message Ready gt x g g 9480 12 CD SELECTING A LANGUAGE FOR THE FRONT PANEL selecting a language for the front panel Messages that appear in the front panel window are in English To change the language to French German Spanish Italian or Japanese follow these steps 1 When the printer is on and the Ready message appears press and release the Menu button the button lab
186. inting press using newsprint paper Custom Profiles Press option COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Base paper Target match Custom Profiles n a m Create custom profiles in the PhaserMatch application to fine tune the printing press color corrections m Refer to the PhaserMatch User Manual for instructions COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Printing in gray scale The Monochrome option prints your color image as a monochrome gray scale shades of gray from black to white COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Using the printer s current color defaults The Use Printer Setting option is available in supported drivers This option sends no color correction information to the printer It uses the current default in the printer to process colors for printing The printer s default can be one of the following Any option selected in the TekColor Corrections menu on the printer s front panel One of the color correction utility files sent to the printer PhaserMatch can download custom profiles to the printer COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Using simple color conversions The following utility files use Adobe s standard color conversions to tell the printer what type of output device you want it to simulate m Raw CMYK Colors RAWCMYK PS Converts all colors CMYK RGB grays to CMYK colors Use this file if your application
187. ion If you have questions about PANTONE Color Matching refer to the HAL article on PANTONE Colors Refer to Using the automated fax systems for information on using the HAL and EuroHAL fax systems There are many variables in process reproduction of colors generated by the Phaser 600 printer any one of which may affect the quality of the PANTONE Color simulation including Type of ink used Type of media used Effective final resolution Dot structure halftones Fusing mode PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED Blue colors look too purple If printed blue colors look too purple print your document with the Vivid Color color correction Refer to Color corrections and Deciding which color correction to use for instructions and more information PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED Using the Tektronix halftone screens Tektronix halftone screens are designed for Tektronix printers and improve print quality over application set halftone screens The Setscreen Off SCRENOFF PS utility file redefines some PostScript operators such as the setscreen setcolorscreen and sethalftone When downloaded to the printer this file prevents applications from overriding the Tektronix proprietary halftone screens Click on the following topics for more information EI Using the Macintosh Setscreen utility file m Using the PC workstation Setscreen utility file PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED Using the Macintosh Set
188. ional Phaser Copystation accessory 9480 40 SETTING UP THE PRINTER Registering your printer 1 Find the customer registration card that is appropriate for you U S or international versions 2 Fill out the card and mail it By registering your printer with Tektronix you are validating the product warranty and ensuring that you will be sent information about upgrades service and accessories as it becomes available SETTING UP THE PRINTER Unpacking instructions The Phaser 600 Color Printer Quick Start Instructions describes how to remove the printer from its shipping pallet and prepare it for setup It is an overview of the printer installation for experienced users For detailed instructions refer to the setup procedures in this user manual NOTE wy v Save all packing material in case you need to move or ship the printer If you have not already removed the printer from its shipping pallet follow the instructions in the Quick Start Installation booklet before continuing with the hardware setup described in this chapter SETTING UP THE PRINTER Moving the printer to its operating location After removing the printer from the shipping pallet you can wheel it to its operating location When doing so follow these guidelines m lomovethe printer make sure that the casters are unlocked the locking lever should be up The casters on the printer are designed for rolling on smooth inside surfaces 9
189. it the file and substitute the values you want for those in the file Color values can be any decimal number between 0 0 and 1 0 For example to change pen 4 to a purple color and a width of 5 mm edit the HPGLPENS PS file and change the line for pen number 4 to the following 4 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 5 When you have finished editing the file use one of the following methods to send the HPGLPENS PS file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file Tektronix Z CARING FOR YOUR PRINTER Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer Overview Click on the following topics for more information on cleaning procedures Cleaning hints Quick cleaning Occasional cleaning Emptying the waste bin Repacking and moving the printer CLEANING HINTS Cleaning hints To ensure the best print quality and the most reliable printer operation follow these simple guidelines Use only Tektronix ColorStix ink sticks specifically made for the Phaser 600 printer Never load broken ink sticks into the printer Keep the ink sticks protected from dirt dust and breakage Do not handle the ink sticks except when loading them into the printer Excessive handling can cause the ink sticks to jam or break To maintain print quality use the informa
190. ith your hard disk to see if the disk needs formatting If your disk is already formatted go on to Initializing a formatted SCSI hard disk FORMATTING A SCSI HARD DISK CAUTION AN Once you start the formatting procedure there is no way to cancel the formatting process Click on the following topics for more information m Macintosh users m PC and workstation users FORMATTING A SCSI HARD DISK Macintosh users Refer to Macintosh software for instructions on installing the printer s files Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the Format Printer Disks file from the list then click Open This file was installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue If output is returned by the printer you won t see this dialog box check your hard disk for the file the utility created for the printer s output FORMATTING A SCSI HARD DISK PC and workstation users Refer to
191. ity files to the selected desktop printer This command cannot be used on a shared printer except by the Macintosh hosting the shared printer Select highlight a desktop printer icon Select Printer Utilities from the Printing menu In the Utility pop up menu select the utility you want downloaded to the printer then click OK See Printer utilities for a list of utilities available in this dialog box If you see an alert message click OK or Cancel as desired PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Printer utilities The following utilities can be downloaded to the printer with the Printer Utilities command from the Printing menu Print Startup Page Print Configuration Page Print CMYK Sampler Print RGB Sampler Print HSB Sampler Print Fonts Sampler Print PANTONE Sampler PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Download PostScript files Use the Send PostScript File command in the Printing menu to download PostScript files to the selected desktop printer For example use this command to download the utility files included on the CD ROM and diskettes shipped with the printer This command cannot be used on a shared printer except by the Macintosh hosting the shared printer Select highlight a desktop printer icon Select Send PostScript File from the Printing menu Select the PostScript file you want to download Click Open to send the file to the printer SETTING UP A SHARED PRINTER Setting up a shared printe
192. ity files from either the Phaser 600 CD ROM or the Printer Software for Windows diskette Locate the installed files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory on your hard disk Use one of the following files m Select SCREENON PS to enable setscreen operations m Select SCRENOFF PS to disable setscreen operations Use one of the following methods to send a file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command or the Copy command in Windows 3 1 File Manager to send the file to the printer Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file SELECTING PAGE SIZES IN WINDOWS APPLICATIONS Selecting page sizes in Windows applications In some Windows applications you can select printer page sizes in a Print Setup dialog box accessed from the File menu If you use a Print Setup dialog box to select the Phaser 600 printer from your application some page sizes may not be visible in the list If the Phaser 600 printer page size you want to use is not visible in the list do the following m Windows 3 1 m Windows 95 SELECTING PAGE SIZES IN WINDOWS APPLICATIONS Windows 3 1 From the Main window open the Control Panel and double click the Printers icon In the Printers dialog box select Phaser 600 in the list of printers Click the Setup button In the Setup dialog box select the page size you want and click OK Return to your application If you open the Print Setup di
193. ity files on the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM already have Control D characters at the beginning and end You can send CTRLD PS to the printer by itself to make sure the printer is in the end of job condition CONFIGURING A PRINTER S SERIAL PORT Configuring a printer s serial port If your printer has the optional serial port installed you can configure the port using the DEVPARAM PS file or by using front panel selections NOTE sy v To modify the DEVPARAM PS file you should be familiar with the PostScript setdevparams command You should also know how to use PostScript dictionaries and key value pairs You should edit the DEVPARAM PS file and send it to the printer before using other utility files to change the printer s performance CONFIGURING A PRINTER S SERIAL PORT The following example sets these parameters m Flow control to Xon Xoff m Parity to none Data bits to 8 Stop bits to 2 Baud rate to 9600 In this example the changes are persistent across jobs and across printer power cycles they remain in effect until you change them again tSerial_NV lt lt Password def FlowControl Xonxoff def Parity None def DataBits 8 def StopBits 2 def Baud 9600 def gt gt setdevparams CONFIGURING A PRINTER S SERIAL PORT See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files View the DEVPARAM PS file in a text editor and substitute the values you want to use for
194. iver for selecting printing options and provides fast screen copy printing see Printing from UNIX workstations PhaserSym software and EasyCopy X for VMS workstations provides proper communication with the printer see Printing from VMS workstations The menus on the printer s front panel let you select printing options refer to Using the Front Panel for instructions on using the front panel Downloadable utility files let you select printing options see Using the utility files for a list of topics PRINTING FROM UNIX WORKSTATIONS Printing from UNIX workstations For UNIX environments Tektronix offers the optional PhaserPrint for UNIX software PhaserPrint for UNIX software offers driver selectable printer options and provides fast raster file and screen copy printing to Tektronix color printers PhaserPrint for UNIX software is available for these workstations Workstation Operating System Sun SunOS 4 1 3 Solaris 2 3 2 4 SGI IRIX 4 0 5 2 5 3 HP 9000 700 800 HPUX 9 0 5 IBM RS 6000 AIX 3 2 DECstation Ultrix 4 0 4 4 DEC Alpha OSF 1 3 0 and 3 2 PRINTING FROM UNIX WORKSTATIONS PhaserPrint for UNIX software works with the workstation s native spooling system to print PostScript files and raster files in these formats Sun Raster Format SRF xwd and SGI RGB A demonstration copy of PhaserPrint for UNIX software along with an installation guide is available on the printer s CD ROM in the UNIX
195. kDraw GX does not work with non QuickDraw GX printer drivers If you want to print from non QuickDraw GX applications with a driver such as the LaserWriter 8 x you must first disable QuickDraw GX see Disabling QuickDraw GX for instructions Click on the following topics for more information System requirements Installing the Phaser 600 GX printer driver Creating a desktop printer Setting up unique desktop printers Printing with a desktop printer Setting up a shared printer Printing from QuickDraw GX applications Printing from non QuickDraw GX applications Viewing printer status Disabling QuickDraw GX SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS system requirements NOTE sy v You must have an optional PhaserShare card installed in the printer before using the installed software The Tektronix Phaser 600 GX printer driver requires the following hardware and software m AnApple Macintosh Il computer or later m Atleast 8 Mbytes of RAM E QuickDraw GX INSTALLING THE PHASER 600 GX PRINTER DRIVER Installing the Phaser 600 GX printer driver Use the installer application on the printers CD ROM to install the Phaser 600 GX printer driver See Macintosh software for instructions Then go on to Creating a desktop printer for instructions on creating a desktop printer CREATING A DESKTOP PRINTER Creating a desktop printer QuickDraw GX requires you to create desktop printers for printing Depending on the type of application yo
196. ket of 10 ORDERING PRINTER SUPPLIES Phaser 600 printer accessories Order number Description Accessories 016 1257 00 Media roll holder 118 9396 00 Extra media roll endcap 118 9316 00 Output bin 118 9307 00 Ink Loader 4540 Phaser Copystation printer accessory Manuals 070 9480 00 Phaser 600 Color Printer User Manual 063 2429 00 Phaser 600 Color Printer Quick Reference Guide 063 2628 00 Phaser 600 Color Printer Quick Start Installation 063 2629 00 Phaser 600 Color Printer Supplies Information Sheet 063 267 1 00 Phaser 600 Repacking Instructions 070 9538 00 PhaserShare Network Cards and Software System Administrator User Manual 070 9539 00 PhaserShare Status Software User Manual 070 9270 00 PhaserMatch User Manual Printer software 063 2428 00 Phaser 600 Printer Software diskettes 063 2653 00 Phaser 600 Color Printer CD ROM ORDERING INTERFACE CABLES AND ADAPTERS Ordering Interface cables and adapters The following cables and adapters are available through Tektronix or your dealer Contact your dealer for other cables and adapters Order number Description Connectors and cable length 012 1468 00 Parallel cable Connects the printer s parallel port toa PC or workstation parallel port 36 pin high density plug to 25 pin DSUB plug 3 meters 9 84 feet 013 0299 00 Parallel
197. l with the maximum width image Hint If you have files that do not set the page size set the printer s default media size in the front panel ALL ABOUT MEDIA Page size print area and margins The Phaser 600 printer a wide format printer is capable of printing on roll media and cut sheets on a variety of media sizes Cut sheets From Custom 175mmx175mm 7x7in To Arch E 914 x 1219 mm 36 x 48 in Roll Media Width From 305 mm 12 in TO 914 mm 36 in Because the printer has been designed for wide format printing you will get the best results when you use cut sheet media that is at least B size 11 x 17 in 279 x 432 mm and media rolls at least 420 mm 16 5 in in width Although the drivers allow you to select ANSI A A4 Arch A and custom page sizes you cannot select them as the default in the front panel You may experience more frequent media skewing or jams with the smaller media sizes Click on the following topics for more information m Roll media sizes EI U S Cut sheet media sizes Roll media sizes Size Metric Width U S Width 305 to 914 mm 12 to 36 in Diameter 127 mm max Diameter 5 in max Print area Metric Maximum image length 45 7 m U S Maximum image length 150 ft ALL ABOUT MEDIA Margins Leading Trailing Sides O mm O mm 5mm 2 in ALL ABOUT MEDIA Cut sheet media sizes Click on the following topics for more
198. lable but requests for the optional fonts will be replaced with Courier CLEARING A MEDIA JAM Clearing a media jam NOTE sy v If the printer has frequent media jams clean the printer regularly see Caring for Your Printer At a glance If a media jam occurs the front panel reports Clear lt Location gt Jam These are the types of media jams that can occur Exit jam Internal jam Entrance jam Fuser jam CLEARING A MEDIA JAM Overview For any media jam clearing it consists of these basic steps for complete instructions refer to Clearing a media jam Cut the media if necessary roll media Open the top cover and use a pen to move the printhead to the far right Open the exit cover and move the fuser to the side Remove the jammed media from either the exit or top paper path CLEARING A MEDIA JAM Hints If media is not loaded and the front panel reports a media jam open the top cover and close it again to clear the error message Whenever jammed media extends from the exit path remove it from that location with a downward movement Pulling media in the same direction as the paper path leaves less residue inside the printer than backing media out of the printer from the drum area After removing the jammed media inspect the inside of the printer for loose pieces of media and remove them If the printer frequently reports Clear Entrance Jam make sure that your media cuts are smooth and tha
199. ld For roll media Set Page Rotation to 90 degrees to save paper Set Cut Media to After each job to print the pages in a continuous banner Set Advance Media to Never to save paper PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART If you are not using a supported driver Print your document with the following front panel selections or downloadable utility files Any other selections will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently Set Media size to Letter in a driver Set Color Correction to None front panel or utility file Set the Print Quality to Standard front panel or utility file Set Fusing to Cold front panel or utility file For roll media set Page Rotation to 90 degrees utility file only For roll media set Media Cutting per Job to print the pages ina continuous banner front panel or utility file PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART Printing from Acrobat PC You can open the PANT600 PDF file in Adobe s Acrobat Reader application and print just the pages you want See Installing the PC files if you haven t already installed the files If you don t already have a copy of Acrobat Reader install the application from the printer s CD ROM see Installing the PC files Once Acrobat Reader is installed locate the PANT600 PDF file in the PANTONE directory on either the printers CD ROM or the Printer Software for Windows diskette Double click the file to launch Acrobat Reader and ope
200. lel port 1 Type the following command at the DOS prompt if LPT1 is not available use LPT2 MODE LPT1 P See your DOS documentation for details on the MODE command You can add the MODE command to your AUTOEXEC BAT file so that it takes effect every time you turn on your computer Refer to your PC user documentation SETTING UP PORTS Setting up optional interface ports For instructions on setting up any of the optional PhaserShare interface ports refer to the PhaserShare Network Cards and Software System Administrator Manual PRINTING FROM DOS Printing from DOS Click on the following topics for more information m Using color corrections m Using a Tektronix driver E Using a non Tektronix driver PRINTING FROM DOS Using color corrections Driver selectable TekColor color correction features are available only though printer drivers such as the Adobe PS3 driver or the Windows 95 PostScript driver Select color corrections through the printer s front panel or with downloadable utility files PRINTING FROM DOS Using a Tektronix driver Many DOS applications include printer drivers for Tektronix printers Check the application you are using for a printer driver for a Phaser 600 printer Install and use the driver according to the application s documentation PRINTING FROM DOS Using a non Tektronix driver If the application you are using does not have a driver for a Phaser 600 printer
201. lel port supports uni directional default and bi directional communications Click on the following topics for more information Disabling timeouts m Bi directional status reporting m Parallel port pin signals DISABLING TIMEOUTS Disabling timeouts When you use the parallel port be sure to type this command in DOS at the PC if LPT1 is not available use LPT2 to disable timeouts In Windows connect to ERIS MODE LPT1 P BI DIRECTIONAL STATUS REPORTING Bi directional status reporting For bi directional communications the parallel port supports two modes Compatibility Mode and Nibble Mode The interpretation of interface signals depends on the current mode Compatibility Mode provides host to printer communication in a manner compatible with a uni directional interface Nibble Mode provides printer to host communication and may be combined with Compatibility Mode to provide bi directional communication NOTE SE For more information refer to the IEEE P1284 document for parallel interfaces The bi directional utility files are provided for support of operating systems and applications such as Windows 95 that are capable of bi directional status reporting with a printer connected to the parallel port You do not need a special cable refer to Ordering Interface cables and adapters for information on ordering the standard parallel cable available from Tektronix NOTE AT 4 v Windows 3 0 and 3 1 do not s
202. lication to install a printer driver such as the Adobe PSPrinter driver and the Pantone Files item in the Custom Install window See Macintosh software for details If you are going to be printing the entire PANTONE Color sampler chart also install the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install window If you are going to be viewing and printing selected pages of the PANTONE Color sampler chart also install the Acrobat Reader from the Custom Install window Locate the files in the Pantone Files folder inside the PhaserTools folder created on your hard disk by the installer application Click Pantone overview to return to the main topics list INSTALLING PANTONE FILES Installing the PC files The PANTONE Color files are available on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM and on the Printer Software for Windows diskette 1 From the printer s CD ROM or diskette use the Installer application to install the Pantone Files item in the Custom Install Utilities window See PC Windows software for details If you are going to be printing the entire PANTONE Color sampler chart also install the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window If you are going to be viewing and printing selected pages of the PANTONE Color sampler chart also install the Acrobat Reader from the Custom Install Utilities window Locate the files in the PANTONE subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by
203. loads PostScript header information with each print job Click the Send Header Now button to save the PostScript header information in the printer then select the Assume header is downloaded and retained option This option makes print files a little smaller and faster than the first option but you need to click the Send Header Now button every time the printer is turned off or reset PRINTING FROM A PC Click the Advanced button to see more options Select Use PostScript Level 2 features For faster printing select Binary communications protocol under Data format To ensure job integrity select Send Ctrl D before and after a job Click OK when finished Under PostScript Timeout values leave Job Timeout set to 0 Set WaitTimeout to the default 240 4 minutes Setting it higher ensures that you will not lose a multi page job due to a timeout after the Transmission Retry alert message is displayed PRINTING FROM A PC Using the AdobePS 4 driver with Windows 95 To select printing options follow these steps 1 In the Printers window click the Phaser 600 printer icon with the right mouse button then select Properties from the menu Click the following tabs to see printing options refer to your Windows 95 documentation for more information on tabs and options Click the Details tab to see timeout and other options m Set the Timeout settings Not Selected Type a value from 0 to 999 in this text box to set the number o
204. local dealer or in the United States call Tektronix at 1 800 835 6100 Phaser 600 printer supplies Supplies Order number Description ColorStix ink sticks 016 1453 00 Black Box of 48 016 1454 00 Cyan 016 1455 00 Magenta 016 1456 00 Yellow 016 1566 00 Rainbow Pack 6 sticks per color Paper Rolls Smooth White Bond 016 1474 00 610 mm x 60 9 m 24 in x 200 ft 016 1475 00 914mmx60 9m 36 in x 200 ft Photo Grade 016 1476 00 610mmx45 7m 24 in x 150 ft Piee aa oa e a Ie In A a TSO S Premium Tracing 016 1478 00 914 mm x 45 7 m 36 in x 150 ft Backlit Paper Phaser 600 printer supplies cont d Supplies Order number ORDERING PRINTER SUPPLIES Description Transparency Transparent Film 016 1483 00 914 mm x 22 8 m a X S k sula iei Backlit Display Film 016 1479 00 914mm x 15 2 m oe 6O fi Specialty Repositionable Media Rolls Adhesive Display Vinyl 016 1481 00 914 mm x 15 2 m s X SO ifik Artists Presentation Canvas 016 1482 00 914 mm x 10 7 m esol Lamination High Gloss Lamination Film Film 016 1496 00 940 mm x 76 2 m x 250 ft Fuser Kit 016 1472 00 Contains m 2 fuser wheels 2 foam oiler wheels m 2 cutters Cleaning Kit 016 1400 00 Contains m 10 pre soaked alcohol cloths a Lint free cloths m 1 plastic bottle 2 oz m 10 foam swabs m 1 cleaning tool Pre soaked alcohol cloths 006 7824 01 Pac
205. locations 479 Ordering information 484 Connecting a SCSI hard disk 485 Required items 486 Important guidelines 487 Connecting one disk 490 Connecting multiple disks 491 Formatting a SCSI hard disk 493 Initializing a formatted SCSI hard disk 497 Enabling and disabling SysStart Job execution 500 USING THE PRINTER S PARALLEL PORT 505 Overview 506 Disabling timeouts 507 Bi directional status reporting 508 Parallel port pin signals 510 USING DIFFERENT PRINTER LANGUAGE MODES 513 Installing the files 516 Setting PostScript and HP GL job and wait timeouts 517 Changing the printer s language mode 522 Printing PostScript files 524 Printing HP GL files 525 Enabling automatic language selection 526 Testing printer language mode changes 527 Testing HP GL mode 528 Testing PostScript mode 529 Setting default HP GL pen colors 530 CARING FOR YOUR PRINTER Overview 536 Cleaning hints 537 Quick cleaning 539 Feed rollers and paper guides Transport rollers 542 Drum 544 Occasional cleaning 545 Back tension blade and paper clamp 546 Clamp rollers 552 Fuser shuttle and exit rollers 553 Ink loader 565 Cleaning the printhead 567 Emptying the waste bin 569 Front panel displays Empty Waste Bin 570 Before moving the printer 571 Repacking and moving the printer 573 TROUBLESHOOTING 580 If you need help 581 Downloading files from the Tektronix Color Printer Information Server 583 Using the automated fax systems 585 Use HAL in
206. m After each job Cut Media Options Printer Features Cut Media Driver for Windows 3 1 Feature PRINTING FROM A PC Tektronix PostScript Driver cont d Description Driver selection Advance Media m Never m After each page After each job a Allow Hot Fusing Advance Media Options Printer Features Advance Media Print Preview a On m Off Print Preview Available only with the Extended Features option Options Printer Features Print Preview Page Rotation O degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees Page Rotation Options Printer Features Page Rotation Page Centering a On a Off Page Centering Options Printer Features m Page Centering Driver for Windows 3 1 Feature PRINTING FROM A PC Tektronix PostScript Driver cont d Description Driver selection Image Smoothing a On a Off Image Smoothing Options Printer Features Image Smoothing Color Control Strip a On a Off Color Control Strip Options Printer Features Color Control Strip Mirror Print a On m Off Mirror Print Options Printer Features Mirror Print PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 95 AdobePS 4 and Microsoft PostScript Drivers Feature Description Driver selection Media size m ANSI A B C D E m ISO A4 A3 A2 A1 AO a JIS B1 B2 B3 B4 a Arch A B C D E m 30 x 42 i
207. m Color_Printers Anonymous ftp server ftp tek com Color_Printers America Online keyword Tektronix CompuServe go Tektronix Type of service How to access Details HAL automated fax system EUroHAL 503 682 7450 direct outside US and Canada 1 800 835 6100 toll free for US and Canada Refer to Using the automated fax systems 24 hours day 7 days week 24 hours day 7 days week 24 hours day 7 days week Downloading files from the Tektronix Color Printer Information Server Unix and VMS workstation utility files included with the printer on a PC diskette let you set up the printer to select between media trays print quality modes color correction modes and other features If you don t have the means of transferring these files from the PC diskette you can request files from the Tektronix Color Printer Information Server an automatic file serving program on the Internet that responds to requests for files If you can exchange electronic mail with other Internet sites you can access the Tektronix Color Printer Information Server From this server you can retrieve driver and utility files and color printer information Send your electronic mail requests for files to the following address color_printer_info TEKTRONIX TEK COM To receive the list of information available on the server type the following at the Subject prompt send index To examine the full index for any library type send
208. m the Apple menu b Select the LaserWriter 8 x driver or the Adobe PSPrinter driver Select your printer in the list Click the Setup button USING COLORSYNC ON A MACINTOSH e The correct PPD file should be selected automatically If the PPD file is not selected automatically the Printer Descriptions dialog box opens showing the location of the PPD files you installed in Step 1 Select one of the following PPD files m Use the TKPH6001 PPD file with the standard version of the printer m Use the TKP600P1 PPD file with the printer s extended features option NOTE wy v If you are not sure which printer configuration you have press and hold down the O button on the printer s front panel Printer information appears on the lower line of the display f Click the Select button g Click OK then close the Chooser USING COLORSYNC ON A MACINTOSH From the Apple menu select Control Panels Select ColorSync System Profile and select the profile for your monitor Close the Control Panel Select Print from the File menu In the Print dialog box click Options In the Print Options dialog box make the following selections a Inthe Print pop up menu select one of the following ColorSync Color Matching Color conversions are done by the computer PostScript Color Matching Color conversions are done by the printer this selection has a longer processing time b Select your printer in the Printer Profile pop up men
209. more than eight ink sticks of any color at one time Open only the ink sticks you will immediately use exposure to dust and overhandling can cause an ink jam SETTING UP THE PRINTER 4 Slowly pull back each ink s slider to release the ink sticks into the printer 5 Close the ink loader cover 9480 57 CAUTION Make sure that the ink loader cover is completely closed otherwise the printer will not power up Attaching the output bin 1 Remove the output bin from its packing box Also remove the small plastic bag that contains two bolts and an Allen wrench With the output bin folded at its joint hook the short end a over the back upright rail b of the printer Align the openings of the long end of the SETTING UP THE PRINTER output bin with the openings in the front legs of the printer Insert a bolt into the opening on each front leg tighten them with the Allen wrench 9480 124 SETTING UP THE PRINTER Attaching the Quick Reference Guide The Phaser 600 Quick Reference Guide is designed to attach to the printer above the front panel 1 Remove the reference guide from the accessories box 2 Peel the backing from the double sided tape 3 Press the booklet onto the top right side of the printer above the front panel 9480 123 CONNECTING THE PRINTER Connecting the printer NOTE vy v Make all printer connections before yo
210. mple output of some color corrections at the bottom of the printer s startup page Refer to Printing the startup page for more information NOTE sy v If your printer is networked and you have changed the front panel settings make sure that you tell other users on the network Printer settings affect all prints made with non supported drivers ALL ABOUT MEDIA All about media Selecting media by size You can select media by size through the printer drivers or from the front panel This printer is capable of printing on cut sheet media in several sizes refer to the Stg Mh table on the Page size print area M 24 in and margins as well as media rolls ranging in width from 175 to 914 mm 7 in to 36 in 9480 51 Tektronix offers paper rolls with the widths shown in the illustration NOTE ax 4 v The Tektronix media rolls have a three inch core If you are using a media roll with a two inch core you must remove the adapter on the paper roll holder Refer to Using a 2 inch core media roll removing the core adapter for instructions ALL ABOUT MEDIA Margins and print area When the printer places an image on media the maximum image area print area is a bit smaller than the physical media size you may need to adjust the page margins in your application software to match the print area NOTE sy v If you rotate an image remember that the margins remain the same relative t
211. mputer s disk drive CD ROM Insert the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive Double click the Phaser 600 Installer icon Click Continue until the Easy Install window appears To automatically install the printer s screen fonts and other printer software click Install in the Easy Install window Or select Custom Install from the pull down menu available with the installer on the CD ROM only Then select the Screen Fonts item and click Install Fonts are installed in the Fonts folder inside your System Folder Select the printer font you want to use within an application and see the same font on the screen Using fonts with Windows Before printing you need to make sure the fonts specified in your document are installed in the printer or are set up correctly in Windows If you request a font in an application that is not resident in the printer or is not correctly installed in Windows the text is printed in the Courier typeface Or to use fonts that are not resident in the printer do one of the following EI Use a font downloader supplied with your font package to download the desired font to the printer Edit your W N INI file so the Windows driver automatically downloads the fonts you need as part of a print job Refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation for details on this procedure Some font packages automatically update the PostScript port entries in your WIN INI file when you in
212. n Custom sizes Selecting media by size Properties Paper tab Paper Size Media source m Manual Feed m Roll Feed Selecting media by size Properties Paper tab Paper Source Print quality modes Standard m Enhanced Print quality modes Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Print Quality PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 95 AdobePS 4 and Microsoft PostScript Drivers cont d Feature Description Driver selection Color correction Color corrections Properties m None default Vivid Color Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Custom Profile Device Options tab Printer Features Color Correction Fusing Mode Media Fusing Fusing Mode m Cold m Hot m None Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Fusing Mode Cut Media m Never m After each page m After each job Cut Media Properties Device Options tab Printer Features m Cut Media PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 95 AdobePS 4 and Microsoft PostScript Drivers cont d Feature Description Driver selection Advance Media m Never m After each page After each job a Allow Hot Fusing Advance Media Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Advance Media Print Preview a On m Off Available only with the Extended Features
213. n see Front panel displays Empty Waste Bin then re insert it into the printer EMPTYING THE WASTE BIN Press the button on the front panel until the Ready message appears in the display Turn off the printer Refer to Repacking and moving the printer for information on how to prepare the printer for shipment or a long move REPACKING AND MOVING THE PRINTER Repacking and moving the printer Click on the following topics for more information m Before you begin Cables and media Ink loader Clean up Repack the printer REPACKING AND MOVING THE PRINTER Before you begin 1 Empty the waste bin refer to the instructions on Before moving the printer then turn the printer off Let the printer cool down for 15 minutes before you move it so that the ink has time to solidify REPACKING AND MOVING THE PRINTER Cables and media Remove the power cord and any network cables Open the top cover and paper roll cover rewind the media onto the roll and remove the roll Remove the paper roll from the holder and repack the paper roll in its original shipping box Re insert the empty paper roll holder into the printer close the paper roll Cover REPACKING AND MOVING THE PRINTER Ink loader Open the ink loader cover and remove any unused ink sticks You can use tweezers to remove any ink sticks that you cannot remove with your hands Use an alcohol swab to clean inside the ink loader see Ink loader
214. n the file PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART View and print pages from the color sampler chart file as desired You can manually feed Letter size media or use roll media If you are printing from a supported driver such as Adobe PS3 for Windows 3 1 or the Windows 95 PostScript driver Print your document with the following selections Any other selections in the driver will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently m Set Media size to Letter Set Color Correction to None Set the Print Quality to Standard Set Fusing to Cold For roll media Set Page Rotation to 90 degrees to save paper Set Cut Media to After each job to print the pages in a continuous banner Set Advance Media to Never to save paper PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART If you are not using a supported driver Print your document with the following front panel selections or downloadable utility files Any other selections will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently Set Media size to Letter in a driver Set Color Correction to None front panel or utility file Set the Print Quality to Standard front panel or utility file Set Fusing to Cold front panel or utility file For roll media set Media Cutting per Job to print the pages ina continuous banner front panel or utility file Set Page Rotation to 90 degrees utility file only PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART Printing the entire ch
215. n overrides the following selections for prints made from the driver m A color correction utility file if one has been downloaded to the printer m The selection on the printer s front panel TekColor Corrections menu SHARING THE PRINTER ON A NETWORK When you print from a supported driver with the Use Printer Setting option your images are printed with one of the following selections m A color correction utility file if one has been downloaded to the printer m he selection on the printer s front panel TekColor Corrections menu When you print from a non supported driver your images can be printed with one of the following selections m A color correction utility file if one has been downloaded to the printer m he selection on the printer s front panel TekColor Corrections menu If the colors on your prints are not what you expected and your system administrator has disabled some of the printer s front panel menus ask what settings are in effect and whether a color correction utility file has been downloaded to the printer You can also print a configuration page to see the current color correction selection see Printing the configuration page for instructions SHARING THE PRINTER ON A NETWORK If the LaserWriter Utility does not work Apple Talk The LaserWriter Utility cannot be used if the printer is connected to a print server See your system administrator to temporarily remove the printer fr
216. ndcap s core b c Slide the adapter onto the endcap and 9480 132 push until it snaps into place Load the media roll as you would normally a Slide the media roll onto the shaft so that the fixed endcap fits inside the core of the media roll m Replace the removable endcap MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS Startup page prints even though it is disabled The printer s power up self test can detect problems that do not necessarily make the printer completely inoperable Examples of these non fatal errors include faulty printer ports and some memory failures If the printer detects a non fatal error at power up the startup page prints even if you have disabled it In this case the page contains one or more of the error messages listed in the following table Depending on your needs you may not need to call for service immediately Message Description Parallel Port failed I O Card failed SCSI Port failed DRAM SIMM x failed Extended Features SIMM failed The named port is not working The other ports can still be used One of the memory SIMMs is not working In this message X indicates the number of the SIMM that failed Since the printer s base memory is still working the printer can still be used but throughput may suffer The Extended Features SIMM is not working The printer can be used but no access to Print Preview Reprint and Copystation no access to the 22 extra fonts The base fonts are still avai
217. new diskette in a text editor such as Notepad c Locate the following section in the PRINTER INF file ProductType STF_PLATFORM I386 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 cont d d Replace 1386 with one of the following depending on your computer type MIPS for a MIPS platform Alpha for an Alpha platform ppc for a PowerPC e Save the PRINTER INF file 2 Double click on the Print Manager icon in the Main window 3 If you have a PostScript printer driver installed go on to Step 4 If not install one now Driver files are required to complete the Tektronix printer installation a From the Printer menu select Create Printer the Create Printer dialog box appears b Under Driver scroll through the list and select a PostScript printer such as the Apple LaserWriter NT and click OK c Follow the on line instructions to install the driver files from your Windows NT CD ROM or diskettes 4 In the Printer menu select Create Printer under Driver select Other 5 When prompted type in the CD ROM or diskette drive location click OK 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 cont d 6 Select your printer and click OK Tektronix Phaser 600 standard configuration Tektronix Phaser 600 with Extended features Extended Features option Note Press and hold down the printer s button on the front p
218. ng the color charts PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Installing the files The color sampler chart files for the Macintosh are located on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM and diskettes 1 Follow the instructions in Macintosh software to install the printer s software Select Easy Install to automatically install the software or select a printer driver such as the Adobe PSPrinter driver and the Samplers item in the Custom Install window You can select color corrections from the printer s front panel However if you need to select color corrections with downloadable utility files also install the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install window You may need to use utility files if the printer is some distance away from you or if you are not using one of the provided drivers Locate the files in the Samplers folder inside the PhaserTools folder created on your hard disk by the installer application PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Important preparations To match colors on the charts to colors selected within an application use the same printer color correction to print the charts that you are going to use when selecting and printing those colors within an application Printing from a supported driver 1 Print a color chart with either the Vivid Color front panel selection or the Vivid Color utility file downloaded to the printer 2 Print from an application with the driver s Vivid Color option selected Printing from a
219. nging default distance 464 Advance Media 224 Advance Media Macintosh utility file 464 INDEX JK LMNOPQRSTUV WX Y Z ADVMEDIA PS PC utility file 464 AIS PS PC utility file 526 alcohol isopropyl cleaning with 538 America Online 581 Apple LaserWriter 8 driver setting up 76 using 140 AppleTalk printer name 443 applications color adjusting 217 printing from _149 QuickDraw GX _365 automated fax systems 585 automated information system HAL 148 149 automatic cutting 226 automatic language selection 181 automatic scaling Copystation _246 back tension blade cleaning 546 before powering up _33 BIDIR PS PC utility file 508 bi directional status reporting enabling and disabling 508 Bulletin Board Service BBS 581 C cable ties removing _20 cables ordering 732 SCSI 486 caring for your printer 535 casters wheels about 16 locking _32 CD ROM 12 change printer s name 443 445 Chooser printer doesn t appear 609 selecting a driver 600 CIE colors 198 clamp rollers cleaning 552 cleaning back tension blade 546 clamp rollers 552 drum 544 exit rollers 553 561 front panel setting 547 fuser 553 isopropyl alcohol 538 kit contents 538 occasional cleaning _545 paper clamp 546 A BCD EF GH printhead 567 quick cleaning 539 tool 548 clearing an ink jam 676 clearing media jams 672 CMYK Sampler Macintosh utility file 256 CMYK PS PC utility file 256 color adjusting or correcting _197 guidelines for
220. nsion Setup from the Printing menu Make selections as desired Click Save PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Selecting printing options Use the Printer Driver Defaults command in the Printing menu to set default options for the selected desktop printer This dialog box includes such options as the color corrections and print quality modes NOTE sy v The printer defaults dialog box is also available through the Print command in the File menu for QuickDraw GX applications Phaser 600 Defaults PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Options Color Correction None SWOP Press SNAP Press Vivid Color Euroscale Press Monochrome Simulate Display Commercial Press Use Printer Setting Print Quality Standard Enhanced Fusing None Cold Hot Advance Media Never After Each Job After Each Page Cut Media Never After Each Job After Each Page Page Rotation None 180 Degrees 270 Degrees 90 Degrees Image Smoothing Off Color Control Strip Off Print Preview Off Mirror Print a a Off Page Centering m a Off Display Manual Feed Dialogs Check box on to see a dialog box confirming each page you want to print with manual feed If you check this box on then go to the Print dialog box to select Use Manual Feed PRINTING WITH A DESKTOP PRINTER Downloading printer utilities Use the Printer Utilities command in the Printing menu to download printer util
221. nstall select a location to install the PhaserMatch icon Click Next to continue After the Installation Completed dialog box appears click Yes to view the README TXT file then click Finish PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the drivers for Windows 95 Microsoft PostScript driver Adobe PostScript driver 4 1 Follow Installing printer software for Windows through Step 6 ge Z NX 2 Click Next in the Add Printer 2 In the driver setup dialog box Wizard dialog box click Read for driver instructions click Next 3 Select your printers connection a Local Printer printer connected to your computer a Network Printer printer accessed through a network o 4 Type in the drive you are using 4 Select the drive you are using Click OK select the directory for ADOBEPS4 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the drivers for Windows 95 cont d Microsoft PostScript driver Adobe PostScript driver 5 Select your printer Tektronix Phaser 600 Standard configuration Tektronix Phaser 600 with Extended Features Extended Features option Note Press and hold down the front panel s button for configuration information 6 Select the port your printer is connected to and click Next 7 Select the Phaser 600 as the default printer click Next 8 Return to Installing printer software for Windows to perform Step 7 and Step 8 of the installation procedure See the Adobe PostSc
222. nting from a Macintosh m Printing from a workstation PRINTING FROM A PC Printing from a PC You can print from a PC with or without a printer driver The supported drivers allow you to select printing features right from your computer Without a supported driver you can make some printing selections from the printer s front panel refer to Using the Front Panel Click on the following topics for more information Print features quick reference Windows printer drivers Using the Microsoft PostScript driver with Windows 95 Using the AdobePS 4 driver with Windows 95 Using the Tektronix printer driver for Windows 3 1 Using the Adobe PostScript driver for Windows 3 1 Using the Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 PostScript driver Using the Windows NT 4 0 PostScript driver Printing From DOS PRINTING FROM A PC Print features quick reference Windows printer drivers Click on the following topics for individual print feature tables for each driver Driver for Windows 3 1 AdobePS 3 PostScript Driver Driver for Windows 3 1 Tektronix PostScript Driver Driver for Windows 95 AdobePS 4 and Microsoft PostScript Drivers Driver for Windows NT 4 0 PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 3 1 AdobePS 3 PostScript Driver Feature Description Driver selection Media size m ANSI A B C D E m ISO A4 A3 A2 A1 AO a JIS B1 B2 B3 B4 a Arch A B C D E m 30 x 42 in Custom sizes Selecting medi
223. o send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE PC utility file PRNTCNFG PS 1 Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the printer s software Select Easy Install to automatically install the software or select the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Use one of the following methods to send the PRNTCNFG PS file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE Printing the configuration page with PhaserLink software Refer to the PhaserShare Status Software User Manual for information on using your World Wide Web browser to access the printer PRINTING THE STARTUP PAGE Printing the startup page By default printing of the startup page is enabled on power up However you can print the startup page anytime you need information on the number of pages that have been printed the amount of installed memory the number of fonts in memory and installed interface ports Use the following metho
224. o the leading and trailing edges if an unrotated image is placed against the trailing edge it will be clipped when it is rotated because the leading edge s margin is larger NOTE sy v To assure the correct page margins use the drivers supplied by Tektronix Click on the following topics for more information m Cut sheet media E Roll media ALL ABOUT MEDIA Cut sheet media z i 8 mm 0 33 in The image area is smaller than AN the page size in width and length This illustration shows the margins for a cut sheet as it is loading into and fed through the printer 5 mm 0 2 in 5 mm 0 2 in 5 mm 0 2 in 5 mm 0 2 in 22 mm 0 88 in 22 mm 0 88 in 9480 50 Typical use Leading edge Orientation Rotation 1 Short side preferred Portrait 0 or 180 2 Long side Landscape 50 ATARE Roll media The maximum image area is the entire requested page size up to the limits of the roll width The image s origin point 0 0 is 5 mm from the media edge If the requested page size is the same width as the roll 10 mm of the image will be clipped If the media runs out while making a print the whole page is printed when a new roll is installed Any size media roll is fully printable up to the width of the roll minus the side margins ALL ABOUT MEDIA 5mm lt 900 mm 35 6 in gt are In N 0 0 Tt 9480 75 totalling 10 mm This illustration shows a 36 inch media rol
225. of the holder closest to the ink loader has a removable plastic nut and endcap The right side of the holder closest to the front panel has a fixed endcap TE sy v The endcaps are set up for media rolls with a three inch core if you are using media on a two inch core the endcaps can be adjusted Refer to Using a 2 inch core media roll removing the core adapter for instructions 9480 66 INSTALLING THE STARTER PAPER ROLL Loosen the plastic nut by turning it until the endcap slides freely Slide the removable endcap from the hal ua Slide the paper roll onto the shaft 9480 35 make sure that the leading edge of the paper comes off the roll from behind as shown center the roll over the fixed endcap UTION Gently slide the paper roll onto the shaft do not let it drop onto the shaft or it can damage the fixed endcap 9480 36 INSTALLING THE STARTER PAPER ROLL Replace the removable endcap it fits inside the core of the paper roll Tighten the plastic nut to secure the endcap 9480 37 Insert the paper roll holder into the printer as shown with the fixed end a closest to the front panel b 9480 38 INSTALLING THE STARTER PAPER ROLL Feeding roll paper 1 When the printer is in the Ready state the front panel displays this message Ready x g g g 9480 12 CD Make sure that the papers leading edge is straight and smooth If it is n
226. om the print server to download any of the PostScript utility files MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS Media hints and tips Make sure that the media is dust free Dust and dirt can result in poor print quality Handle media with both hands at the edges to avoid creases and fingerprints Store media in the original dust free package in the same environmental conditions as the printer Use high grade media For best reliability and image quality always use Tektronix media Tektronix printers and Tektronix supplies are Made For Each Other Refer to Ordering Information for ordering information Tektronix media rolls have a three inch core If you are using a media roll with a two inch core adjust the endcaps on the paper roll holder Refer to Using a 2 inch core media roll removing the core adapter for instructions Feeding media through the printer twice or printing on both sides of the media can reduce the life of the printer s paper path components and may require frequent cleaning MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS If you are using non Tektronix media rolls take care that you stop printing before the media runs out if the media is taped securely to the core the core can unravel feed into and damage the printhead When loading a media roll onto the paper roll holder take care that you do not drop the roll onto the holder The weight of the roll can dislodge the fixed endcap on the holder if this happens media will not feed correctl
227. on or the Vivid Color VIVDCOLR PS utility file downloaded to the printer Print from an application with either the Vivid Color front panel selection or the Vivid Color VIVDCOLR PS utility file downloaded to the printer PRINTING FROM A PC The following table lists the driver color correction settings with their corresponding utility files and front panel settings Which color correction to use If you plan to print Then print the chart with the corresponding color correction set colors from an either with a utility file downloaded to the printer or selected application with this from the printer s front panel color correction selected in a driver Driver Color PC utility file name Correction selection Simulate Display DISPEAY PS Vivid Color VIVDE OER PS Use Printer Setting any color correction utility file Commercial Press COMRCIAL PS Euroscale Press EUROSCAL PS SWOP Press SWOPEESS PS SNAP Press SNAPRESS PS None NOCORECT PS Printer s front panel selection TekColor Corrections menu Display Vivid Color any front panel color setting Commercial Euroscale SWOP SNAP None Use the same color correction to print the chart and later to print the colors from an application PRINTING FROM A PC Printing the color charts See Installing the files to locate the color sampler charts See Setting up the printer to load media Decide which color correction you need to use see Impo
228. on 47 EasyCopy X workstation software _144 147 407 empty the waste bin 569 enabling and disabling the startup page 713 Enhanced print quality mode 154 Enhanced Quality Macintosh utility files 477 ENHANCED PS PC utility file 477 entrance jam 670 error codes and messages 592 handlers PostScript 635 indicator front panel 35 PostScript _630 Ethernet ordering _735 PhaserShare card and protocols 31 problems 609 EtherTalk printer name 445 EuroHAL automated fax system 582 588 Euroscale Press color correction description _205 selecting from the front panel 152 selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 exit cover opening 543 556 exit jam 670 exit rollers cleaning 553 561 Extended Features fonts 184 option 2 upgrade ordering _736 external hard disk SCSI ID 29 extracting files from unix tar 421 A BCD EF GH Fast Preview _234 343 fastest printing available 623 fax systems information 585 feed rollers cleaning 540 feeding roll paper 43 foam oiler wheel ordering _730 replacing 557 font sampler printing from a Macintosh _190 printing from aPC 192 Font Sampler Macintosh utility file 190 fonts adding a hard disk 482 Adobe Type 1 Type 3 183 downloading _185 Extended Features 184 Macintosh screen fonts _187 resident typefaces 6 standard configuration 183 TrueType 6 186 FONTS PS PC utility file 192 Format Printer Disk Macintosh utility file 495 fo
229. on is selected in Supported printer drivers and used only with roll media The amount that the media is advanced is measured in points the default advance is set to 72 points 25 4 mm 1 inch but it can be changed to your specification with a PostScript utility file that is shipped on the printer s CD ROM or diskettes Options m Never Off default Prints one page after another without adding extra space after any pages After Each Job Per Job Advances the media only after the last page of a job is printed After Each Page Per Page Advances the media after each page is printed Allow Hot Fusing Automatically selected if the Fusing Mode option is set to Hot Advances media automatically after each page is printed SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Hints If the Fusing Mode is set to Cold None or Printer s Default the available options for Advance Media are Never After Each Job and After Each Page If the Hot option for Fusing Mode is selected the printer automatically selects Allow Hot Fusing for the Advance Media option the other options are not available If you do not have the Phaser 600 printer driver you can use the PostScript utility files shipped on the printer s CD ROM or diskettes Refer to Downloading files to the printer for instructions on downloading utility files SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Cut Media This feature is selected in supported printer drivers or from the front panel in the Med
230. on of Apple s LaserWriter 7 1 2 printer driver Use it if you are using System Software 6 0 7 or 7 0 and later It is the easiest driver to use After installing the printer s software including the Phaser 600 Driver Installing printer software for Macintosh select Chooser from the Apple menu Click on the Phaser 600 printer driver icon on the left side of the Chooser Click on the Zone for your printer See your network administrator if you have questions Click on your Phaser 600 printer in the list of printers on the right side of the Chooser If it is not in the list check your hardware connections and which zone you have selected in the Chooser 5 Close the Chooser MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Setting up the Adobe PSPrinter driver Note The Adobe PSPrinter driver uses printer specific PPD PostScript Printer Description files for information on a printer s page sizes and printing options Follow these steps to use the Adobe PSPrinter driver with a Phaser 600 printer If the printer is busy it may take some time to complete this set up procedure do this when the printer is idle You only have to set up a printer once For more information on this driver refer to the Adobe PSPrinter Manual on the printer s CD ROM for more detailed information on the Adobe PSPrinter driver After installing the printer s software including the Adobe PSPrinter Driver and Printer Descriptions Installing printer software fo
231. on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu SETTING PAGE OFFSET Select the Page Offset XY utility file you just modified in the list then click Open This file was installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the Phaser Tools folder Atthe prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for afile name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type in a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue SETTING PAGE OFFSET Setting page offset from a PC See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files Open the OFFSETXY PS utility file in a text editor as plain text and locate the following lines MyXOffset 0 def MyYOffset 0 def Replace O with the amount you want where X is the wide axis of the paper and Y is the long axis of the paper Save the file renaming the file if desired Use one of the following methods to send the file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send a file to the printer as you would any PostScript file ADDING CONTROL D CHARACTERS TO PC FILES Adding Control D characters to PC file
232. ontrol file downloaded to the printer Refer to Enabling and disabling SysStart Job execution for more information NOTE sy v If the Sys Start file contains an error the printer ignores the remainder of the file and may not start up as expected CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK Format and initialize Unless the disk is already formatted for operation with a PostScript printer you have to format and initialize the disk after connecting it to the printer m Refer to Formatting a SCSI hard disk and Initializing a formatted SCSI hard disk after connecting a hard disk CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK Connecting one disk CAUTION To avoid damaging components turn off the printer any external disks anda CopyStation if you have one before you connect or disconnect a SCSI cable Turn on the disk and CopyStation if you have one connected before you turn on the printer SCSI port External disk SCSI port Terminator not 3 Sel required if the disk has a built in 9480 138 terminator or if you have a Phaser Copystation connected at the other end of the chain CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK Connecting multiple disks CAUTION To avoid damaging components turn off the printer and external disk before you connect or disconnect a SCSI cable Turn on the disks before you turn on the printer The printer can support up to six external disks When you have more than one disk connected to the
233. option Print Preview Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Print Preview Page Rotation O degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees Page Rotation Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Page Rotation Page Centering a On m Off Page Centering Properties Device Options tab Printer Features m Page Centering PRINTING FROM A PC Driver for Windows 95 AdobePS 4 and Microsoft PostScript Drivers cont d Feature Description Driver selection Image Smoothing a On a Off Image Smoothing Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Image Smoothing Color Control Strip a On a Off Color Control Strip Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Color Control Strip Mirror Print a On m Off Mirror Print Properties Device Options tab Printer Features Mirror Print Driver for Windows NT 4 0 Feature Description PRINTING FROM A PC Driver selection Media size m ANSI A B C D E m ISO A4 A3 A2 A1 AO m JIS B1 B2 B3 B4 a Arch A B C D E m 30 x 42 in Custom sizes Selecting media by size Print Properties Advanced tab Paper output Paper Size Media source m Manual Feed m Roll Feed Selecting media by size Print Properties Advanced tab Paper output Paper Source Print quality modes Standard m Enhanced Print quality
234. or differently Printers use the subtractive primaries CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black and produce color when light is reflected off the paper Computers use the additive primaries RGB red green blue with a light emitting CRT screen The printer and the computer screen each have a different range of possible colors they can produce with some overlap between them Software application packages specify color in different ways for example as CMYK or RGB or they may give you a choice Get to know your applications so you can work more efficiently The TekColor color correction options are available for a finer degree of control over color Since no single color correction option can address all uses refer to the following table for the description that best fits your printing situation and try the suggested color correction For the greatest control of color matching the PhaserMatch software shipped with your printer allows you to create and customize color profiles Refer to the PhaserMatch User Manual for detailed information and instructions COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Color correction descriptions Click on the following topics for more information Turning off all color corrections Printing the brightest colors and a truer blue Simulating display screen colors Closely match printing press colors Printing in gray scale Using the printer s current color defaults Using simple
235. orrection to None a Set the Print Quality to Standard a Set Fusing to Cold PRINTING PANTONE COLORS FROM AN APPLICATION If you are not using a supported driver Print your document with the following front panel selections or downloadable utility files Any other selections will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently Set Color Correction to None m Set the Print Quality to Standard a Set Fusing to Cold PRINTING PANTONE COLORS FROM AN APPLICATION Printing PANTONE Colors from a PC Windows application 1 Select PANTONE Colors within an application using the colors on the chart 2 Print your document using one of the following methods If you are printing from a supported driver such as Adobe PS3 for Windows 3 1 or the Windows 95 PostScript driver Print your document with the following selections Any other selections in the driver will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently m Set Color Correction to None Set the Print Quality to Standard m Set Fusing to Cold PRINTING PANTONE COLORS FROM AN APPLICATION If you are not using a supported driver Print your document with the following front panel selections or downloadable utility files Any other selections will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently m Set Color Correction to None front panel or utility file a Set the Print Quality to Standard front panel or utility file m Set Fusing to Cold front panel or utili
236. ot use the cutting tool that was shipped with the printer to cut a smooth edge along the printer s cutting guide Refer to Cutting roll media for complete instructions on getting a straight leading edge 9480 69 INSTALLING THE STARTER PAPER ROLL With the paper roll cover open use the guide on the right side of the printer to ensure that the paper enters straight Holding the paper by the outside edges guide the paper evenly into the slot between the top cover and printer body until it stops about two or three inches and buckles slightly The printer picks the paper and advances it and the front panel displays a series of messages Loading Unloading when the media is successfully loaded the Ready message appears TE ax 4 v The printer advances the paper to measure the paper and calibrate for its width Loading Once the paper is measured the printer reverses the paper Unloading so that it is aligned and ready to print INSTALLING THE STARTER PAPER ROLL 6 Close the paper roll cover SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Software installation Packaged with your printer is a CD ROM and a set of diskettes that contain the software you need to use the printer Included are automatic installer applications drivers printer description files PPDs color sampler charts and utility files Click on Overview for all PC and Macintosh platforms for more information SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Over
237. out of the exit path 9480 92 m With the exit cover open remove the jammed media Pull the back tension blade s handle toward you and hold it in that position this lifts the blade away from the drum and releases the jammed media m Remove the media by pulling it out of the printer CLEARING AN INK JAM Clearing an ink jam If an ink stick falls over in the loader Use a pen or pen like object to insert into the opening and rotate the ink stick to the up position If you have trouble reaching an ink stick you can raise the slider or slide the keyplate up for better access 9480 64 CLEARING AN INK JAM If an ink stick doesn t drop completely Use tweezers to lift the ink stick out of the printhead or use a pen or pen like object to push the ink stick into the printhead If you have trouble reaching an ink stick you can slide the keyplate up for better access 9480 33 UTION A belt in the ink loader may be out of position after an ink jam Do not try to reposition it or you may damage the ink loader The belt resets to the correct position when the next ink stick is loaded CLEARING AN INK JAM Removing the ink loader If you are unable to clear an ink jam with the procedures lf an ink stick falls over in the loader and If an ink stick doesn t drop completely you can remove the ink loader 1 Open the ink loader cover Using your hands or tweezers remov
238. own 9480 104 Make sure that the leading edge of a media roll is cut evenly corners are 90 and smoothly before feeding it into the printer refer to the illustration For instructions on getting the best cut on the media roll refer to Cutting roll media SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Media problems cont d Symptom Solution Frequent media jams cont d When you feed the media into the printer do the following a Align the media with the guide on the printer so that it feeds evenly and straight m As you feed the media into the printer insert it until it stops against the feed rollers making sure it touches all rollers at once Clean the printer s rollers and drum See Feed rollers and paper guides for instructions To optimize the printers wide format design use cut sheet media at least B size and or roll media at least 16 5 inches wide for better feed reliability Open the top cover and exit cover to check the paper path for any obstruction SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Media problems cont d Symptom Solution Media skews Make sure that the fixed end of the paper roll holder the side without the removable plastic nut is installed at the side closest to the front panel Make sure that the media is installed so that it loads over the top of the roll Refer to the drawing on the previous page Make sure that the media is fed into the printer evenly To optimize
239. p printer in the Print dialog box Drag a document onto a desktop printer icon The application corresponding to the document opens prints the document and then quits PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH If you are using non QuickDraw GX applications do one of the following m Print to the default desktop printer with the Print command from the File menu Drag a document onto a desktop printer icon The application corresponding to the document opens displays the Print dialog box and waits for you to click Print After printing the document the application quits Selecting printing options Most of the commands in the Printing menu are standard QuickDraw GX driver commands and are documented by Apple see the Macintosh Guide on line document for details The last group of commands in this menu are printer specific Use the Printer Driver Defaults command in the Printing menu to set default options for the selected desktop printer NOTE sy v The printer defaults dialog box is also available through the Print command in the File menu for QuickDraw GX applications PRINTING FROM A WORKSTATION Printing from a workstation Overview You can print from a UNIX or VMS workstation through Ethernet Token Ring parallel or serial interfaces Workstation users can print from any application that generates color PostScript For instructions and examples on creating print queues for your specific platform see the Tektronix World
240. panel select the scaling percentage examples C4 based on these 3 2429 32 l eee 200 lt 3x5in 195 4x6in 180 5x7in 125 A4 8x 10 in 120 A 8 5x 11 in FI N 100 Legal 8 5 x 14 in 3 2429 31 Media size interactions PHASER COPYSTATION Copies that you make on the Copystation are automatically scaled to fit the default media size set for the printer regardless of the media that is loaded in the printer If the printer s default media size setting differs from the installed media your image may not print as expected The default media size selected in the printer s front panel should match the actual media loaded in the printer Media size selected in Media used the front panel Results ANSI B 10 6 x 16 in ANSI C 16 6 x 21 in ANSI C 16 6 x 21 in ANSI C 16 6 x 21 in ANSI D 21 6 x 33 in ANSI C 1616 x 2 in Assumes the Copystation is set for 100 scale Image does not fill the image area Image correctly fills the image area Image is cropped at the boundaries of the media s printable image area PHASER COPYSTATION Set the default media size in one of the following ways Front panel Media Size selections in the Media Defaults menu Downloaded utility file Refer to Downloading files to the printer or the World Wide Web for instructions on downloading a utility file PHASER COPYSTATION Printing
241. pproximately 100 m 300 ft of 36 inch wide roll media two media rolls 1 Using a large lint free cloth soaked with isopropyl alcohol or a pre soaked alcohol cloth wipe the entire length of the drum to remove any dust or wax residue Using your hand rotate the drum to expose and clean more of the drum clean its entire surface in this manner OCCASIONAL CLEANING Occasional cleaning Perform these occasional cleaning procedures when you notice a problem with the print quality or media feed reliability Each procedure indicates a general guideline Click on the following topics for more information Back tension blade and paper clamp Clamp rollers Fuser shuttle and exit rollers Ink loader Cleaning the printhead OCCASIONAL CLEANING Back tension blade and paper clamp m Clean the back tension blade when you notice ink on the leading margin of the print ai Clean the paper clamp when the printer experiences frequent media jams Removing the media roll Lift the top cover latch on the upper right side of the printer Open the paper roll cover Remove the media roll Lock the top cover latch by pressing it down OCCASIONAL CLEANING Setting the front panel for cleaning access On the printer s front panel press the Menu button the printer displays this message Help Pages lt gt Menu Press the arrow button gt until you see this message Utilities K gt Menu
242. printer follow these guidelines m Each disk must have a unique SCSI ID number Do not turn on the printer or disk until each disk has a unique number The printer must always be at one end of the chain with a terminator at the other end CONNECTING A SCSI HARD DISK SCSI port External disks Terminator not required if the end disk has a built in terminator if you have a Phaser Copystation connected at the other end of the chain The middle disk must not have an internal terminator FORMATTING A SCSI HARD DISK Formatting a SCSI hard disk CAUTION AN The following procedure erases all data from all SCSI hard disks connected to the printer Disconnect from the printer any hard disk you do not want reformatted for example a disk containing fonts This procedure formats and initializes all SCSI hard disks connected to the printer so the disks are usable with the PostScript Level 2 Phaser 600 printer The formatting process erases all information already on the disk be sure you want the disk formatted before you use this procedure If you have a disk containing information you want to keep such as fonts turn off all devices then disconnect the disk from the printer before using this file to format other disks Use this procedure to format and initialize a SCSI hard disk NOTE sy Some menor are formatted at the factory and do not require this formatting procedure check the documentation that came w
243. printer you won t see this dialog box check your hard disk for the file the utility created for the printer s output ENABLING AND DISABLING SYSSTART JOB EXECUTION PC and workstation users Refer to PC Windows software for instructions on installing the printer s utility files Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Select one of the following files Use the SYSTART PS file to enable automatic execution of the Sysstart job Use the NOSYSTRT PS file to disable automatic execution of the Sysstart job Use one of the following methods to send the desired file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send a file to the printer as you would any PostScript file ENABLING AND DISABLING SYSSTART JOB EXECUTION Front panel You can also control SysStart Job execution from the printer s front panel 1 Locate the SCSI Startup Mode option in the Printer Defaults menu See Using the Front Panel for instructions on using the printer s front panel 2 Select either On or Off Tektronix W4 USING THE PRINTER S PARALLEL PORT Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer OVERVIEW Overview The printer has an asynchronous parallel port that lets you interface with PCs The paral
244. py of the printer s startup page Install the utility files from the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM see Macintosh software for instructions Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the Print Start Page file from the list then click Open This file was installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder PRINTING THE STARTUP PAGE At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type anew name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue PRINTING THE STARTUP PAGE PC utility file PRNTSTPG PS 1 Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the printer s software Select Easy Install to automatically install the software or select the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Use one of the following methods to send the PRNTSTPG PS file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer
245. quick print of your image with slightly reduced image quality This option reflects the color correction you have selected for this image Hints m For lower resolution images you can improve the print quality of Fast Preview prints by activating the Image Smoothing option SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Print Preview This Extended Features option selected in supported printer drivers prints a small thumbnail version of the job s first page The image is reduced by one fifth in height and width or to Tabloid size 11 x 17 in or its Metric equivalent whichever is smaller A dashed outline indicates the full sized image and its placement SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Once the preview image is printed the printer s front panel displays this message and waits for user interaction Print Preview Cancel Pause 5 g g g Li 9480 12 CD 5 Cancel Ends the Print Preview returning the printer to Ready Pause Enters the Pause menu which allows you to print the image at a different scale Scale selections include m 25 to 400 Scale to Fit which automatically scales the preview image to fit the media installed in the printer or if media is not installed the front panel selection Prints the full size image and all subsequent pages of the print job SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Options m On m Off default Timeout The printer waits a set amount of time for the user to pres
246. r You can share a desktop printer in the same way you share files folders or volumes with the Sharing command in the File menu Both the host and client computers must have a copy of the same printer driver Create a desktop printer see Creating a desktop printer for instructions Highlight the desktop printer icon you want to share Select Sharing from the File menu Click the check box to turn on Share this printer Click the close box At the alert message click Save The desktop printer s icon changes to reflect the change in status to a shared printer SETTING UP A SHARED PRINTER Using a shared printer If you want to use a printer hosted by another user s computer do the following Open the Chooser from the Apple menu Click the Phaser 600 GX printer driver icon on the left side of the Chooser In the Connect via field s pop up menu select Servers The list of printers in the Chooser changes to show only shared printers Click on the shared printer you want to use Close the Chooser PRINTING FROM QUICKDRAW GX APPLICATIONS Printing from QuickDraw GX applications Use the following dialog boxes if you are using QuickDraw GX applications with the Phaser 600 GX driver m Using the Page Setup dialog box m Using the Print dialog box PRINTING FROM QUICKDRAW GX APPLICATIONS Using the Page Setup dialog box Select Page Setup from the File menu then click the More Choices button to see the exp
247. r Control Strip Mirror Print a On m Off Mirror Print Page Setup Options Flip Horizontal Vertical PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver for QuickDraw GX Tektronix Phaser 600 GX Feature Description Driver selection Media size m ANSI A B C D E m ISO A4 A3 A2 A1 AO a JIS B1 B2 B3 BA a Arch A B C D E m 30 x 42 in Custom sizes Selecting media by size Page Setup m Paper Size Media source m Manual Feed m Roll Feed Selecting media by size Print Paper Feed Print quality modes Standard m Enhanced Print quality modes Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults Print Quality PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver for QuickDraw GX Tektronix Phaser 600 GX cont d Feature Description Driver selection Color correction Color corrections Printing menu m None default Printer Driver Defaults a Vivid Color m Color Correction Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Custom Profile Fusing Mode Fusing Mode Printing menu Cold Media Fusing m a Hot Fusing Mode m None Cut Media Cut Media Printing menu Printer Driver Defaults m Never gt Printer Driver Defaults m After each page Cut Media m After each job PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Macintosh Driver for QuickDraw GX Tektronix Phaser 600 GX cont d Feature
248. r Macintosh open the Chooser Select the PSPrinter driver icon Click on the Zone for your printer See your network administrator if you have questions Click on your printer in the list of printers in the Chooser Click Setup Click on the PPD for your printer then click Select TKPH6001 PPD Standard configuration a TKP600P1 PPD Extended Features option Note Press and hold down the printer s button on the front panel for configuration information 7 Close the Chooser MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Setting up the Phaser 600 GX driver Note Use the Phaser 600 GX driver if you are using Apple Macintosh QuickDraw GX QuickDraw GX does not work with non QuickDraw GX printer drivers To print from non QuickDraw GX applications with a driver such as the LaserWriter 8 disable QuickDraw GX For more information on this driver refer to Using the Phaser 600 GX Driver After installing the printer s software including the Phaser 600 GX Driver Installing printer software for Macintosh open the Chooser from the Apple menu Select the Phaser 600 GX driver icon Click on the Zone for your printer See your network administrator if you have questions Click on your printer in the list of printers in the Chooser In the Connect via field s pop up menu select your printer s communication method AppleTalk optionStandard network connection m Servers option Selects a shared desktop printer
249. r Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application INSTALLING THE UTILITY FILES Downloading files from the Tektronix World Wide Web site Tektronix has a site on the World Wide Web WWW You can reach the site from a WWW browser at the following address http www tek com Color_Printers At the Tektronix Color Printer home page explore options such as customer support documents and new product information New and updated information is always being added so check the WWW site frequently You can access the Tektronix World Wide Web server WWW to download files such as utilities or drivers Use a web browser such as Netscape or Mosaic and follow these steps Start your web browser and enter the following address ftp ftp tek com Color_Printers bbs Click on the appropriate platform macintosh pcs or unix Click on 600 for Phaser 600 printer specific files Select the files you need the system prompts you to select a location for downloading the files INSTALLING THE UTILITY FILES Downloading files from the Tektronix ftp server The utility files included on the printer s CD ROM let you set up the printer from UNIX and VMS workstations to select between print quality modes color correction modes and other features If you don t have the means to transfer these files from
250. r thoroughly to remove any paper dust build up turn the roller to clean its entire surface Wipe the metal fuser plate especially the section closest to the rubber roller to remove dust and ink Wipe the rubber exit roller thoroughly turn the roller to clean its entire surface UTION To avoid damaging or obscuring the exit sensor do not get any alcohol on it OCCASIONAL CLEANING Inserting the fuser components Whether you are inserting new components or re inserting the existing ones follow these steps s A AN 1 Insert the cutter blade into its slot on the fuser shuttle making sure that the exposed blade is facing up as shown 9480 46 CD Make sure that the cutter is seated in the slots on the fuser secure the cutter by sliding the locking lever 9480 61 CD OCCASIONAL CLEANING Holding the foam oiler wheel by its shaft insert it into its slot on the fuser shuttle Be careful not to squeeze the foam it is filled with oil and the oil might drip Insert the fuser wheel and the media support a Hook the prongs of the media support 9480 28 CD onto the cutter s shaft b Lower the fuser wheel into its slot on the fuser shuttle Once in place spin the fuser wheel to ensure that it is installed properly
251. rClk Printer C mode Negative true data transfer acknowledge N mode Data qualifier nFault nDataAvail Printer C mode Negative true printer fault exists that prevents printing N mode Negative low data ready then data bits O then 4 PError AckDataReq Printer C mode Positive true printer error exists such as media tray empty N mode Data bits 2 then 6 PARALLEL PORT PIN SIGNALS Parallel port signals cont d Signal mode names Return Signal Description Compatibility Nibble pin source Data 1 24 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used Data 2 25 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used Data 3 26 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used Data 4 27 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used Data 5 28 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used Data 6 29 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used Data 7 30 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used Data 8 31 Host C mode Positive true data input N mode Not used nInit nHostRTS Host C mode Negative true reset interface N mode Set positive PARALLEL PORT PIN SIGNALS Parallel port signals cont d Signal mode names Return Signal Description Compatibility Nibble pin source nStrobe HostClk 33 Host C mode Negative true transfer data into printer input latch on rising edge N mode Negative true transfer Ex
252. ray that color is printed rather than the white of the paper Many screen colors cannot be printed accurately on the Phaser 450 or other color printers The printer uses the closest printer colors available for screen colors Consequently flat areas appear on prints where slightly different colors appear on the screen USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS Rendering Intent Relative For jobs in which the most important consideration is matching colors exactly to the computers screen colors This relative rendering does not print the white areas in an image rather it uses the white of the paper USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS Rendering Intent Saturation Use this option for business graphics where the saturation or brightness of the colors is the most important consideration USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS Rendering Intent Perceptual Use this option to improve the appearance of scanned images USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS Selecting Click on the following topics for more information m From the PhaserPrint plug in for Photoshop m From a downloadable utility file USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS From the PhaserPrint plug in for Photoshop If you are using Photoshop you can use the PhaserPrint plug in to select color rendering intents See Using the PhaserPrint Plug in for Photoshop for instructions USING THE COLOR RENDERING INTENTS From a downloadable utility file U
253. re printed at 100 percent saturation or brightness and also at 50 percent The colors reflect the current color correction or PhaserMatch custom profile selected in the driver The printed band also includes information about the file such as File file name Color Profile color correction or PhaserMatch custom profile and the Date Time of printing Use this option to check the consistency of printed colors between prints made on the same printer or between prints made on more than one of the same type or model of printer USING THE PLUG IN Stylized representation of the page The area in the lower left of the dialog box is a stylized representation of the page as ii would look when printed using the current selections in the Scale to fit Printer model Media size Landscape orientation Replicate images Center images and Image separation options When you change any of these selections the representation of the page is redrawn to reflect the new selection If Show color preview of image is on an approximate color image is displayed USING THE PLUG IN Scaling an image m Scale to fit m Click this check box to scale the image to the largest size that will fit the image area of the currently selected page size or orientation a This option automatically updates the value in the Scale field Scale Type in the percentage the image should be scaled from 10 percent to 2000 percent Use this option with the
254. re that you align the right side of the media with the guide on the printer MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS 9 Once the printer grabs the media and advances it close the paper roll cover MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS Using a 2 inch core media roll removing the core adapter If you are using a media roll with a 2 inch core you must first adjust the endcaps remove the adapters to accommodate the smaller core size Start with an empty paper roll holder m Holder is out of the printer a Removable endcap is removed m Media roll is removed from the holder MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS For each endcap Holding the adapter and endcap firmly rock the adapter back and forth to loosen it and pull it off the endcap Load the media roll as you would normally 9480 131 m Slide the media roll onto the shaft so that the fixed endcap fits inside the core of the media roll m Replace the removable endcap Hint If you are using both 2 inch and 3 inch core media rolls order an extra paper roll holder refer to Ordering Information MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS Replacing the core adapter Start with an empty paper roll holder m Holder is out of the printer m Removable endcap is removed m Media roll is removed from the holder MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS For each endcap Align the tabs a on the inside of the a adapter with the V shaped openings e b on the endcap s core The 4 teeth c of the adapter fit over the e
255. rectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application SETTING POSTSCRIPT AND HP GL JOB AND WAIT TIMEOUTS Setting PostScript and HP GL job and wait timeouts NOTE vy v The HP GL job timeout is the same as the PostScript job timeout The following timeouts can be set in the printer m The wait timeout is the amount of time in seconds that the printer waits for data to come from the computer during a job If the data stream pauses for longer than the specified number of seconds a timeout error is generated and the job is canceled The job timeout is the amount of time any single job may be active before it must print a In PostScript mode if the value is exceeded a timeout error is generated In HP GL mode if the timeout value is too small an image may be split across two pages if the value is too large multiple page prints may be combined on one page SETTING POSTSCRIPT AND HP GL JOB AND WAIT TIMEOUTS You can use the CONFIG PS file to change the PostScript and HP GL job and wait timeout values When sent to the printer your edited version of the CONFIG PS file changes the values in the printer but only while the printer is turned on if the printer is turned off or reset the values return to their defaults To restore your desired timeout settings you must send your edited CONFIG PS file to the printer again NOTE sy v The CONFIG PS file affects printer operation If the p
256. rgins on cut sheet media relative to the image If you do not have a supported printer driver you can use the PostScript utility files shipped on the printer s CD ROM or diskettes Refer to Downloading files to the printer for instructions on downloading utility files SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Image Smoothing Image Smoothing is selected from the printer s front panel in the Printer Defaults menu as well as in supported printer drivers Image Smoothing blends adjacent colors in an image so that color transitions are less noticeable This feature is typically used when the image being printed is at a lower resolution than the printer s output resolution For example printing an image downloaded from the World Wide Web at 72 dpi using the printer s 300 dpi Images printed using Image Smoothing appear with less sharp detail but with smoother color transitions Image Smoothing does not affect images at 150 dpi or higher Due to extra internal calculations printing may take longer with Image Smoothing on Options On a Off default SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Hints m If you do not have a supported printer driver you can use the PostScript utility files shipped on the printer s CD ROM or diskettes Refer to Downloading files to the printer for instructions on downloading utility files SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Fast Preview The Fast Preview option is only available for the Photoshop plug ins It produces a
257. rightness that are combined to make a particular color The color chart you print and use depends on how the application you are using selects color Refer to the application s documentation for information on color selection then print one or more of the available color charts Click on the following topics for more information m Available color charts Setting up the printer Printing from a Macintosh Printing from a PC NOTE sy v The PANTONE Color chart is described in Using PANTONE Color Files AVAILABLE COLOR CHARTS Available color charts The color sampler charts print Letter size pages 2 up on B size tabloid paper The following table lists the number of Letter size pages and the corresponding number of B size sheets of paper required to print these charts Number Number of B size Color sampler chart of pages prints CMYK Prints a sample of colors in the 18 9 Sampler CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black color model RGB Prints a sample of colors in the RGB 12 Sampler red green and blue color model HSB Prints a sample of colors in the HSB 12 Sampler hue saturation and brightness color model SETTING UP THE PRINTER setting up the printer The color sampler charts print Letter size pages 2 up on B size tabloid paper You can print each color sampler chart on separate sheets of B size paper or ona continuous sheet of roll paper to create a wall chart You can also cut each Letter
258. rinter driver or the correct PPD file onto your Macintosh so that you can select the correct page sizes from the driver For details on how to print from a Macintosh refer to Printing from a Macintosh SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Print quality problems Symptom Solution Off set ink dots Clean or replace the fuser wheel To save your print as well as the cost and time of having to resend the job m If the ink dots appear in the white space on your print use an eraser to carefully remove the ink Prints have dull faded Check the selected color correction mode colors Clean the printhead from the front panel Utilities menu Refer to Cleaning the printhead Make sure that Media Fusing is turned on and try setting it to Cold Streaks or spots Clean the Clamp rollers Clean the Back tension blade and paper clamp Clean the paper clamp Clamp rollers Clean the exit rollers Fuser shuttle and exit rollers Clean the fuser wheel or replace the Fuser Kit components Removing the fuser components Clean the Feed rollers and paper guides SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Print quality problems cont d Symptom Solution Black and white prints instead of color If you have a Macintosh Make sure that you are using the correct PPD file with the latest Apple LaserWriter printer driver version 6 0 7 or higher which supports color PostScript Make sure that Color Grayscale
259. rinter is shared on a network using this file may affect the prints requested by other users Configure the printer s port to receive PostScript see Printing PostScript files for instructions Locate the utility files on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM refer to Installing the files for instructions Copy the CONFIG PS file to your hard disk and open the file in a text editor SETTING POSTSCRIPT AND HP GL JOB AND WAIT TIMEOUTS The default values for the printer are as follows 0 seconds for the job timeout 40 seconds for the wait timeout 60 seconds for the manual feed timeout A timeout value of 0 indicates no timeout the printer waits indefinitely In the following example the timeouts are set to their default values 3 dict begin Password def JobTimeOut 0 def WaitTimeOut 40 def currentdict end setsystemparams 1 dict begin currentpagedevice ManualFeedTimeout known ManualFeedTimeout 60 def if currentdict end setpagedevice SETTING POSTSCRIPT AND HP GL JOB AND WAIT TIMEOUTS 4 Tochange CONFIG PS to specify different timeouts substitute new values for the following lines Permitted timeout values Time out Suggested timeout values JobTimeOut O or 15 to 999 WaitTimeOut O to unlimited O O To avoid timeouts or job cancellation on Windows multiple page or multiple copy print jobs you may want to set the WaitTimeOut to a high value or to zero O to unlimited 300 Five
260. rinting HP GL files Use the HPGL PS file to change a printer s port to accept only HP GL data After you copy this file to a port the printer expects HP GL files on that port The port s language change is persistent across print jobs and across printer power cycles To use send the HPGL PS file to the printer 1 Locate the utility files on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM refer to Installing the files for instructions Use one of the following methods to send the HPGL PS file to the printer PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager m Workstation users Send the file to a printer as you would any PostScript file CHANGING THE PRINTER S LANGUAGE MODE Enabling automatic language selection Use the A S PS file to change a port to automatic language selection After you copy this file to a port the printer accepts PostScript or HP GL files on that port The port s language change is persistent across print jobs and across printer power cycles To use automatic language selection send the A S PS file to the printer 1 Locate the utility files on the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM refer to Installing the files for instructions Use one of the following methods to send the A S PS file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in
261. ript Printer Driver User Guide on the printers CD ROM USRGUIDE PDF for detailed information on the AdobePS 4 driver PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the drivers for Windows 3 1 Tektronix driver Adobe PostScript driver 4 1 Follow Installing printer software for Windows through Step 6 gk Z NX 2 Type in the drive you are using and 2 The Adobe installer automatically starts click OK Click Continue 3 Select your printer and click Next 3 Click Restart Windows Windows is not Tektronix Phaser 600 Base restarted yet the Adobe installer version standard configuration completes and the printer installer i continues ci IS Sp eta ay E Return to Installing printer software for Extended Features option Windows to perform Step 7 and Step 8 of the installation procedure Then go on to Step 1 of the next procedure Note Press and hold down the front panel s Windows is automatically restarted button for configuration information Y 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the drivers for Windows 3 1 cont d Tektronix driver 4 4 Return to Installing printer software for Windows to perform Step 7 and Step 8 of the installation procedure Then go on to Step 1 of the next procedure below Adobe PostScript driver 4 5 Select your printer and click Install Tektronix Phaser 600 standard configuration Tektronix Phaser 600 Extended Extended Features op
262. rivers selecting 46 error handlers 632 635 errors general 630 language 522 PostScript Header Windows 3 1 driver Windows 95 driver printing errors 630 timeout 518 power indicator 35 598 601 power connecting 34 power up 35 print area cut sheet 159 media rolls 160 print features selecting color corrections _150 selecting print quality modes 150 print job pipelining 460 Print Preview 4 235 print quality 537 Enhanced 154 maintaining 596 selecting print quality modes _150 Standard 154 print quantity Copystation 245 print speed improving _620 624 selecting print quality modes 154 116 103 107 JK LM N OPQ printer features selecting from a Macintosh driver 125 selecting from a utility file 477 selecting from a Windows driver 83 selecting from the front panel 152 front panel menus _720 languages HP GL 514 PCL5 514 PostScript 514 profile for ColorSync _277 renaming 443 445 resetting 447 startup page enable or disable 713 printing _706 status reporting bi directional interface 508 printer configuration information 654 printer control PhaserLink 5 selecting features 151 printer drivers installing DOS 400 Macintosh _69 Windows 48 RS TUV WXYZ using DOS 400 Windows 3 1 115 Windows 95 101 105 Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 118 Windows NT 4 0 119 printer drivers using Macintosh _139 printer information front panel 690 printer languages 187 default 181 printer ports connecting
263. rk running TCP IP Refer to PhaserShare network cards for ordering information Internal 1 Gbyte disk drive Font capacity In its standard configuration the printer Color Printer has 17 resident PostScript fonts additionally it accepts Adobe Type 1 Type 3 and TrueType downloadable fonts For additional font storage the printer provides an internal 1 Gbyte SCSI Small Computer System Interface disk drive as well as a SCSI port that allows you to attach an external hard disk With the Extended Features option the printer has a total of 39 resident PostScript fonts Phaser Copystation The Phaser Copystation accessory enables your printer to be used as a color copier you can scale an image to automatically fit the media that is loaded in the printer up to Architectural E size 36 x 48 inches Requires the Extended Features option Refer to Extended Features upgrade for ordering information INFORMATION ROADMAP Information roadmap Tektronix provides information on the Phaser 600 printer in several ways Phaser 600 User Manual Quick Reference Guide Diskettes This manual includes information on setting up and using the printer Hardware and software set up m Selecting print features in a driver a Caring for your printer m Troubleshooting Designed for handy access of the information you need at the printer a Supplies information a Loading media and ink m Cleaning procedures m Troubleshoo
264. rmat SCSI hard disk from a Macintosh 495 froma PC 496 FreeHand PANTONE color library file Macintosh _294 FRMTDISK PS PC utility file 496 front panel 670 683 JK LMNOPQRSTUV WX Y Z buttons 686 cleaning 547 diagnosing problems 599 display 689 Help Pages 597 indicators 683 685 menu map 691 printing _696 menus 720 messages 599 messages and error codes 592 selecting a language 37 timeout _599 ftp server 581 downloading files from _430 FUSECOLD PS PC utility file 478 FUSEHOT PS PC utility file 478 FUSENONE PS PC utility file 478 fuser jam 670 fuser kit contents 553 ordering _730 removing components 557 fuser shuttle cleaning 553 559 Fusing Mode 222 Fusing Macintosh utility files 478 G getting the best results 644 gray scale printing in 211 H HAL automated fax system 148 149 586 halftone screens 646 handling media 658 hard disk SCSI 482 connecting multiple disks 491 formatting 493 from a Macintosh _495 from a PC 496 ID numbers 29 initializing _497 from a Macintosh _498 from aPC 499 selecting 483 Help Pages menu map 691 printing _695 startup page 36 types available 695 host color correction Windows 95 282 hotline technical support 581 HP GL 181 language 522 pen colors 530 HPGL PS PC utility file 525 HPGLPENS PS PC utility file 530 HPGLTEST PLT PC utility file 528 HSB Sampler Macintosh utility file 256 HSB PS PC utility file 256 A BCD EF GH image area cut sheets
265. rs some from the front panel For a detailed description of these features refer to Printing Beyond the Basics Printing options Option Detailed Description Default setting information Print See Print Prints a thumbnail in selected orientation Off Preview Preview spaced according to current margin settings Outline indicates the image area Available only with the Extended Features option Fusing Mode See Fusing Mode Fuses the ink to media cold or hot also Media Fusing allows you to skip the fusing operation which may be desirable for some media types Cut Media See Cut Media Automatically cuts media after each job After each page after each page or never Printing options cont d Option Detailed information Description IMAGE MANIPULATION Default setting Reprint Advance Media Mirror Print Page Centering Page Rotation Image Smoothing See Reprint See Advance Media See Mirror Print See Page Centering See Page Rotation See Image Smoothing m Prints the last PostScript image as many times as the user indicates on the front panel Scales the printed image enlarge reduce and scale to fit media Available only with the Extended Features option Advances media after each job after each page or never Inverts an image left to right Centers a printed image on the media o il Rotates the image 0 none 90 180 or 270
266. rtant preparations for details If you are selecting a color correction from the printer s front panel Use the TekColor Corrections menu If you need to download a utility file a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send a color correction file to the printer as you would any PostScript file PRINTING FROM A PC 4 Print a color sampler chart using one of the following methods m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file 5 Select colors within an application using the colors on the chart PRINTING FROM A PC 6 Print your document using one of the following methods If you are printing from a supported driver Print your document using a supported printer driver in Windows 95 or Windows 3 1 with the same color correction option selected in the driver that you used with a downloaded utility file or on the front panel to print the chart Any other color correction selection in the driver can cause the colors to print differently If you are not using a supported driver Print your document with the same downloaded utility file or front panel color correction you used to print the chart Any other color correction sel
267. s The ADDCTRLD BAT and CTRLD PS files are included for users who want to write their own PostScript files See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files NOTE sy v If your computer is connected to the printer through the parallel port or the optional serial port you need to have Control D characters in your utility files or in the files you create However if your computer is connected to a network such as NetWare or TCP IP you should not add Control D characters to a utility file The non text Control D character is required at the end of PostScript files sent to the printer s parallel port or optional serial port it signals end of job A Control D should precede and follow most PostScript data files ADDCTRLD BAT and CTRLD PS help you add two Control D characters to your files ADDING CONTROL D CHARACTERS TO PC FILES ADDCTRLD BAT ADDCTRLD BAT is a batch file that adds a Control D to the beginning and the end of afile Use this file if you are creating your own PostScript files To use ADDCTRLD BAT copy ADDCTRLD BAT and CTRLD PS to the same directory on your hard disk Type the following command ADDCTRLD filename where filename is the name of the file that needs Control D characters CTRLD PS CTRLD PS contains some PostScript comments plus the Control D character Copy CTRLD PS to the beginning and or end of your PostScript files before you send them to the printer PostScript util
268. s Select color corrections from the supported drivers with downloadable utility files or from the printer s front panel see Color corrections for instructions The Standard print quality option prints faster than Enhanced Select print quality modes from the supported drivers with downloadable utility files or from the printer s front panel See Print quality modes for details on the print quality modes IMPROVING PRINT SPEED Macintosh users If you are using Adobe Photoshop you can print using the Tektronix PhaserPrint plug in to improve the image data transfer time from your Macintosh to the printer For instructions on installing and using the plug in refer to Using the PhaserPrint Plug in for Photoshop and World Wide Web topics IMPROVING PRINT SPEED Windows 3 1 users using the Tektronix driver From the Control Panel double click Printers Select the Tektronix Phaser 600 printer in the Printers dialog box Disable Use Print Manager in the Printers dialog box Printing via the Print Manager is slower but turning it off ties up the PC longer From the Printers dialog box click Setup From the Setup dialog box click Options From the Options dialog box click Advanced Make sure that the Use PostScript Level 2 Features check box in the Advanced Options dialog box is turned on From your application choose the Tektronix Phaser 600 as your printer Try printing the document again IMPROVING PR
269. s 3 51 server refer to the Tektronix on line services See lf you need help for instructions on using the on line services Click on the following topics for more information m Selecting printer options within an application Print m Selecting printer options within an application Page Setup E Selecting printer options from the Control Panel PRINTING FROM A PC Selecting printer options within an application Print 1 Select Print from the File menu the Print dialog box appears You can select a different printer and other settings in this dialog box Click on the Properties button the Printer Document Properties sheet appears Click the Advanced tab to change any printer features including TekColor This tab displays the same information as the Document Defaults Properties Advanced tab Click the Page Setup tab to see other features This tab displays the same information as the Documents Defaults Properties Page Setup tab TE sy v Changes to any of these settings override the Default Printer Properties settings in the Printers folder PRINTING FROM A PC Selecting printer options within an application Page Setup NOTE sy v If changing the Printer Driver settings through Page Setup causes problems with the application you are using then change the Printer Driver settings through Print under the File menu described in the next topic Select Page Setup from the File menu the Page Setup dialog box appears
270. s _183 RGB Sampler Macintosh utility file 256 RGB PS PC utility file 256 RIP Raster Image Processor 3 ROTAT180 PS PC utility file 478 ROTAT270 PS PC utility file 478 ROTATE90 PS PC utility file 478 ROTATENO PS PC utility file 478 S Scale to Fit in Pause menu 236 screen fonts installing 187 SCREENON PS PC utility file 649 SCRENOFF PS PC utility file 649 SCSI hard disk 482 connecting multiple disks 491 connecting single disk 490 devices 29 RS TUVWX Y Z formatting 493 from a Macintosh 495 from aPC 496 ID numbers 29 initializing _497 from a Macintosh _498 from aPC 499 selecting 483 SCSI port connecting external font disk 482 connecting Phaser Copystation 482 selecting a Macintosh driver to install 70 selecting a print quality mode 154 selecting a Windows driver to install 49 selecting page sizes in Windows applications 650 self tests 35 serial port configuring PC 473 parameter values 476 server ftp Tektronix downloading files from _430 service 581 Setscreen Off Macintosh utility file 647 Setscreen On Macintosh utility file 647 setting up drivers Apple LaserWriter 8 x 76 Macintosh Adobe PSPrinter _74 Macintosh Phaser 600 driver 73 QuickDraw GX _75 A BCD EF GH Windows 3 1 56 Windows 95 54 Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 58 Windows NT 4 0 63 setting up the printer 11 shipping blocks removing _21 shuttle 553 signals parallel port 510 simple color conversions CMYK and RGB 213 Simulate Displ
271. s a front panel button If no button is pressed in that time the job is cancelled and the printer returns to Ready The default timeout is 15 minutes to change the default use the PostScript utility file that is available from Technical Support SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Color Control Strip This feature when selected in a supported printer driver prints a band of colors along the bottom edge of your print The color control strip is useful for checking the consistency of printed colors between prints made on the same printer or between prints made on more than one of the same type or model of printer Options m On m Off default The color control strip has these qualities features SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Includes the printer s eight primary and secondary colors a Cyan Red magenta and yellow a Magenta Green cyan and yellow a Yellow Blue cyan and magenta a Black Black cyan magenta and yellow Each color is printed at 100 saturation brightness and 50 saturation The color strip includes the following information File name Date time of printing Color Profile the currently selected Tekcolor correction or PhaserMatch custom profile These are present on the Color Control Strip if the driver supplies certain PostScript information some drivers do not SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Reprint The Reprint function is available in the front panel s Pause menu if an Extended
272. s from the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX printer driver see Downloading printer utilities for instructions See Installing the files to install the samplers and utility files from the Phaser 600 printer s CD ROM Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser See Setting up the printer to load media Decide which color correction you need to use see Important preparations for details If you are selecting a color correction from the printer s front panel Use the TekColor Corrections menu PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH If you need to download a utility file Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select a color correction file from the list then click Open These files were installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH To print a color sampler chart do the following Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choos
273. s the front panel menu Mode Interactive Press Menu Front Panel Buttons FRONT PANEL 1 Backs up a level of the menu without making a selection Exits the menu and returns the printer to Ready 2 lt Scrolls backward through the available selections gt Scrolls forward through the available selection Menu Accesses front panel sub menus Confirm Implements a selection Print Executes a print command Select Accepis the selected value View Allows the user to view information Pause Press Pause Backs up a levelof the menu without making a selection Exits the menu and returns the printer to Ready Reprint Accesses the Reprint selections Feed Advances the media Cut Cuts the media Mode Print Preview Driver selection FRONT PANEL Front Panel Buttons 1 Provides printer information when pressed and held down Refer to Printer information 2 4 Cancel Pause Print Cancels the Accesses the Prints the Current print Pause menu to Current job preview job print the reduced being image ata previewed different scale Standby Conserving energy Wake Up Pressing any key activates the warm up process eventually bringing the printer to the Ready state FRONT PANEL Two line display The two lines of the display have the following functions
274. screen utility file NOTE sy v If you are using QuickDraw GX and System Software 7 5 you can download printer utilities from the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX printer driver refer to Downloading printer utilities or the World Wide Web for instructions Follow the instructions in Macintosh software to install the utility files from either the Phaser 600 CD ROM or the Printer Software for Macintosh diskette Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED Select one of the following files from the list then click Open These files were installed in the Phaser 600 Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder m Select Setscreen On to enable setscreen operations m Select Setscreen Offto disable setscreen operations At the prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit box or type anew name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED Using the PC workstation Setscreen utility file 1 Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the util
275. se the following downloadable utility files to set the printer s default color rendering intent These files remain in the printers memory only while the printer is turned on If the printer is turned off or reset the default returns to Rendering Intent Relative Computer Downloading methods Utility files Macintosh a All Macintosh users m Rendering Intent Use the LaserWriter Utility to download these files to Absolute the printer Rendering Intent See Downloading files from a Macintosh for z pu instructions m Rendering Intent QuickDraw GX users Relative Use the Phaser 450 GX driver to download these files Rendering Intent to the printer Saturation See Downloading printer utilities for instructions PC Windows m Use the DOS COPY command to download these files RENDABS PS to the printer RENDPER PS See Downloading files from a PC for instructions RENDREL PS m Use the Windows 3 1 File Manager to download these RENDSAT PS files to the printer Workstation Use the appropriate commands for your workstation ENABLING AND DISABLING JOB PIPELINING Enabling and disabling job pipelining The job pipelining utility files offer faster print job throughput for high volume printing environments When job pipelining is turned on the printer begins processing a second print job before completely finishing the current print job Job pipelining is turned on by factory default for the parallel port and optional
276. serial port and is turned off by factory default for all network ports NOTE sy v If you enable job pipelining a mismatch can occur between the job currently printing and a status message displayed for a previous print job The mismatch occurs when a print job already closed but not completely printed develops a problem and reports an error during a subsequent print job Click on the following topics for more information m Enable disable job pipelining from a Macintosh m Enable disable job pipelining from a PC ENABLING AND DISABLING JOB PIPELINING Enable disable job pipelining from a Macintosh Follow the instructions in Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printer s CD ROM to install the printer s software Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select one of the job pipelining files in the list then click Open These files were installed in the Printer Utilities folder inside the PhaserTools folder m Use the Pipelining On file to turn on print job pipelining m Use the Pipelining Off file to turn off print job pipelining ENABLING AND DISABLING JOB PIPELINING Atthe prompt Save PostScript output as you are asked for a file name for saving printer output Use either the default name given in the edit bo
277. size ALL ABOUT MEDIA Media attributes The printer accommodates a broad array of paper film and fabric Tektronix offers a high quality line of media optimized for use with the Phaser 600 printer For ordering information refer to Ordering printer supplies Click on the following topics for information on the types of supported media and the specifications for thickness and stiffness m Media types EI Media thickness range m Media stiffness ALL ABOUT MEDIA Media types Smooth White Bond Photo Grade Presentation Paper Transparent Film Premium Backlit Tracing Paper Backlit Display Film Repositionable Adhesive Display Vinyl Artists Presentation Canvas Media thickness range 1to 5 mm 003 to 020 in paper 0 003 to 0 020 inches films 0 0025 to 0 020 inches fabrics 0 010 to 0 030 inches ALL ABOUT MEDIA ALL ABOUT MEDIA Media stiffness m Must be capable of wrapping around a 119 mm 4 7 in diameter drum without buckling wrinkling or other visible damage ALL ABOUT MEDIA Image orientation NOTE sy v Image orientation refers only to how the image appears on the media relative to the media s long or short edge It does not refer to how the media is loaded into or fed through the printer Image orientation refers to how the image appears on a print You specify the image orientation through your software application or printer 0 driver 1 Portrait Top
278. size page for placement in a binder for easy reference Click on the following topics for setup instructions a If you are using manual feed media a If you are using roll media SETTING UP THE PRINTER If you are using manual feed media Use B size tabloid sheets of paper for the most efficient use of paper Select Media Size ANSI B on the printer s front panel Remove roll media from the input slot Feed individual sheets into the media input slot at the front panel prompt Do not feed subsequent sheets until the previous print has completed SETTING UP THE PRINTER If you are using roll media Use roll paper that is at least 12 inches wide The narrower the roll the less paper is wasted Select Media Size ANSI B on the printer s front panel If you want the charts to print in a continuous banner select Media Cutting per Job on the printer s front panel You may want to set page rotation to 90 degrees to save paper To make this selection use the printer utility files shipped with the printer m Macintosh Use the Page Rotation 90 file See Installing the files and If you need to download a utility file for instructions PC Use the ROTATE90 PS file See Installing the files and If you need to download a utility file for instructions PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH Printing from a Macintosh Click on the following topics for more information Installing the files Important preparations m Printi
279. so it can be downloaded through interface ports that don t support binary data Note that the file may be up to 25 larger Binary If this you choose this option image data is output in binary format USING THE PLUG IN Printer model The Printer model pop up menu lists the printers supported by the PhaserPrint software Select your printer model Phaser 600 so that PhaserPrint can display the correct options for that printer USING THE PLUG IN Media size Select a paper size from this pop up menu See Page size print area and margins for a list of media sizes Paper sizes are printer specific Select your printer in the Printer model field before selecting a paper size USING THE PLUG IN Color correction Select from the options in the pop up menu If Lab is the selected Mode in Photoshop then the Color Corrections are not available If RGB is the selected Mode in Photoshop then the Calibrated RGB option is also available TE sy v Calibrated RGB and Lab modes take longer to print than other modes because the printer must convert CIE colors to RGB or CMYK colors for printing See Color corrections making the best selection for details on the following color corrections a None m SWOP Press m Monochrome a Vivid Color m Euroscale Press m Use Printer Setting a Simulate Display m Commercial Press Calibrated RGB m SNAP Press RGB mode images are printed using the Calibrated RGB color
280. space as determined by Photoshop s Monitor Setup in order to match the currently selected monitor s colors to the printer s colors This option is unavailable if the image is not RGB USING THE PLUG IN Quality m Select from the options in the pop up menu m See Print quality modes for details on the following print quality modes m Standard m Enhanced USING THE PLUG IN Fusing m Select from the options in the pop up menu m The Fusing options work on any media type The default setting is Cold m None Prints may look lighter with more white paper visible around the printed dots The inks may be less durable if they are not fused Cold Flattens the dots adding dot gain and making colors look darker Cold fusing also makes printed colors more resistant to flaking This mode is optimized for use with the TekColor Color Correction options Hot Softens the wax and flattens the printed dots On roll media Hot overrides the Advance Media setting and always adds 8 875 inches of blank paper after each page printed USING THE PLUG IN Advance media Select from the options in the pop up menu The Advance Media feature is for use on roll media only The amount the media is advanced is measured in points the default is 72 points one inch This option is not available if Hot Fusing is selected m Never Prints one page after another without adding extra space between the pages After Each Job Advances th
281. ssage Test Print lt OCCASIONAL CLEANING Press the arrow button until you see this message Change Fuser or Cutter lt gt select Press the Select button The fuser shuttle moves to the far right side of the printer and the front panel displays this message Open Exit Cover Refer to Exposing the fuser shuttle for instructions OCCASIONAL CLEANING Exposing the fuser shuttle NOTE vy v If you have not already removed the media roll do it now To open the exit cover push the latch a on the lower right side of the printer DOWN while holding the exit cover handle b slowly rotate the cover down The fuser shuttle c is visible on the far right inside the printer WY 9480 118 WARNING When lowering the exit cover be careful not to pinch your hand between the paper roll cover and the exit cover OCCASIONAL CLEANING Removing the fuser components NOTE sy v You must remove the fuser wheel before the foam oiler wheel Remove the fuser wheel and media support by lifting it out of the printer 9480 31 CD Remove the foam oiler wheel Be careful not to squeeze the foam it is filled with oil and the oil might drip 9480 25 CD OCCASIONAL CLEANING 3 Remove the cutter aaah AA The
282. stall the fonts Refer to the font package s documentation for instructions For more information on using fonts with Windows request a document catalog from HAL or EuroHAL the Tektronix automated fax systems Refer to Using the automated fax systems for instructions on using these systems Printing font samplers Printing a font sampler from a Macintosh You can print a sample of the printer s resident fonts by downloading the Fonts Sampler utility file to the printer NOTE x 4 v If you are using QuickDraw GX and System 7 5 you can print the fonts sampler from the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX printer driver Install the sampler and utility files from either the Printer Software for Macintosh diskette or the printers CD ROM see Installing printer software for Macintosh for details Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your computer s hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the Font Sampler file from the list then click Open This file was installed in the Samplers folder inside the PhaserTools folder If no messages are returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue Printing a font sampler from a PC You can print a sample of the printer s resident fonts by downloading the FONTS PS utility file to the print
283. stalled the files Locate the PANTONE Phaser 600 aifile in the Pantone Files folder inside the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk Drag the PANTONE Phaser 600 ai file to the Illustrator application folder on your hard disk Start Illustrator Choose Import Styles from the File menu in Illustrator and import the PANTONE Phaser 600 ai file USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Aldus FreeHand 4 0 Macintosh The PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file is used by the application to properly specify PANTONE Colors for the Phaser 600 printer See Installing the Macintosh files if you haven t already installed the files Locate the PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file in the Pantone Files folder inside the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk Place the PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file in the Color folder in the Aldus folder inside the System Folder Start FreeHand From the Colorlist window choose Options Import and select PANTONE Phaser 600 aci USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Aldus PageMaker 5 0 Macintosh The PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file is used by the application to properly specify PANTONE Colors for the Phaser 600 printer See Installing the Macintosh files if you haven t already installed the files Locate the PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file in the Pantone Files folder inside the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk Place the PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file in the Color folder in the Aldus folder inside the Sy
284. stem Folder Start PageMaker Choose Element Define Colors New Libraries then select PANTONE Phaser 600 acrf USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Adobe PageMaker 6 0 Macintosh The PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file is used by the application to properly specify PANTONE Colors for the Phaser 600 printer See Installing the Macintosh files if you haven t already installed the files Locate the PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file in the Pantone Files folder inside the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk Place the PANTONE Phaser 600 acf file in the Color folder in the RSRC folder inside the Adobe PageMaker 6 0 folder Start PageMaker Choose Element Define Colors New Libraries then select PANTONE Phaser 600 acrf USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Using the PC library files Click on the following topics for more information m Adobe Illustrator 3 0 and 4 02 PC m Aldus PageMaker 5 0 PC CorelDRAW PC Click Pantone overview to return to the main topics list USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Adobe Illustrator 3 0 and 4 02 PC The TEK_600 Al file lets you customize PANTONE Colors for Adobe Illustrator and a Phaser 600 printer This file is application specific and printer specific See Installing the PC files if you haven t already installed the files Place the TEK_600 A file in Adobe Illustrator s Color directory Start the Illustrator application Open the file or image
285. sts of the following color correction modes Refer to Color corrections making the best selection for details Color correction mode Front panel selection None Vivid Color Display SWOP Euroscale Commercial SNAP Monochrome n a Driver selection None Vivid Color Simulate Display SWOP Press Euroscale Press Commercial Press SNAP Press Monochrome Use Printer Setting Description Default setting No correction made to colors Produces the brightest possible colors Adjusts color to closely approximate the colors ona standard display screen Specification for Web Offset Publications Typically used to match U S press standards Used to match equivalent 3M Matchprint proofs Used to match commercial 3M Matchprint proofs Used for images designed to be printed on newsprint Prints a color image as a monochrome gray scale Outputs color page masters in black and white for photocopying Uses the color correction mode specified in the printer s front panel setting rather than any printer driver setting SELECTING PRINT FEATURES The press color corrections SWOP Euroscale Commercial and SNAP can be customized with the PhaserMatch software that is included with the printer For an overview of the PhaserMatch software refer to PhaserMatch For detailed information and instructions refer to the PhaserMatch User Manual that was shipped with the printer You can view an approximate sa
286. sured in points Save the file renaming the file if desired Use one of the following methods to send the file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send a file to the printer as you would any PostScript file SETTING PAGE OFFSET Setting page offset You can use the Page Offset XY OFFSETXY PS file to change the default width X and length Y axes on roll media The printer s default is O zero The new default value remains in the printer s memory even between printer power cycles NOTE sy v Turning on the Page Centering option overrides the Page Offset selection Click on the following topics for instructions E Setting page offset from a Macintosh E Setting page offset from a PC SETTING PAGE OFFSET Setting page offset from a Macintosh 1 Follow the instructions in Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printer s CD ROM to install the printer s software Open the Page Offset XY utility file in a text editor as plain text and locate the following lines MyXOffset 0 def MyYOffset 0 def Replace 0 with the amount you want where X is the wide axis of the paper and Y is the long axis of the paper Save the file renaming the file if desired Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility in the PhaserTools folder
287. sy access to troubleshooting information on media jams ink jams and cleaning procedures Configuration Page is found in the Help Pages menu accessed from the front panel This page provides useful information for installation and troubleshooting Refer to Printing the configuration page for instructions PS Error Handler is loaded from the Printer Defaults menu of the front panel Used to diagnose PostScript problems When a PostScript error occurs an error page prints out if the error handler is enabled SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Maintaining print quality If you notice a problem with the quality of your prints Such as ink smears streaks or off set ink dots the probable solution is cleaning one of the printer s components drum exit rollers paper clamp rollers paper clamp back tension blade fuser etc Clean the printer regularly Handle the media only by the edges to avoid fingerprints Keep the ink sticks packaged until you are ready to use them To help you diagnose the problem print the test print from the Utilities menu in the front panel Always do this before calling the Customer Support Hotline because it contains useful diagnostic information Troubleshooting quick reference Symptom Possible Causes SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS Solution Power indicator is blinking The printer is receiving processing or printing a job Wait for the job to be completed or cancel the job You have ent
288. t a printer description file and choose Get Info from the File menu Make a note of the version date Windows 3 1 users Check a printer description file s creation date in the File Manager Make a note of the version date Windows 95 users Check a printer description file s creation date in the Windows Explorer Make a note of the version date Check Tektronix World Wide Web site or the Tektronix Bulletin Board Service BBS to see if the printer description files you have are the most recent Refer to If you need help for instructions POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS Using a PostScript error handler The error handling utility enabled in the Printer Defaults menu of the printer s front panel is useful for diagnosing problems when a job doesn t print It provides a PostScript error handling function to help determine the cause of some PostScript printing problems PostScript errors are printed on a page with other status information when an error occurs This utility can be useful to programmers and technical support for debugging PostScript code To turn the error handler on click on one of these topics m Using the error handler from the front panel m Using the Macintosh error handler utility file a Using the PC and workstation error handler utility file POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS Using the error handler from the front panel In the printer s front panel press the Menu button Press the right or left arrow but
289. t Selected Type a value of from 0 to 999 in this text box to change the number of seconds Windows waits before notifying you that a printer is off line The default is 15 seconds Transmission Retry On large or multiple page documents you may see an Alert message that the printer is no longer accepting data before the job is completely sent to the printer Set this option to a larger value such as 900 seconds 15 minutes to avoid these unnecessary timeouts The default setting is 45 seconds Click the PostScript tab to see PostScript related options In the Performance Options field select the Use PostScript Level 2 Features option Under PostScript Timeout values leave Job Timeout set to 0 Set WaitTimeout to the default 240 4 minutes Setting it higher ensures that you will not lose a multi page job due to a timeout after the Transmission Retry alert message is displayed Click the Job Control tab to see print job related options PRINTING FROM A PC NOTE wy The POOP header contains important PostScript information that must accompany each print job it is not a banner page printed with each job If an option is not selected an error message is displayed on your computer screen and your job does not print m Click one of the following in the PostScript Header field Select Download Each Job This option downloads PostScript header information with each print job Select the Already Downloaded option to save the Pos
290. t shared f the printer is a local printer only 16 Select one of these options then click Finish Yes Print a test page Recommended a No Do not print a test page 17 Insert the original Windows NT distribution CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive 18 Type in the path name to the requested files then click OK The files are usually in the 1386 directory for Intel based Windows NT servers 19 If you printed a test page check if it printed then click OK End MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Macintosh software Click on the following topics for more information m Which Macintosh driver to install m Custom Install or Easy Install MACINTOSH SOFTWARE Which Macintosh driver to install Macintosh Driver Features Notes Phaser 600 Apple 7 1 2 m Simple familiar interface for 7 1 2 users m No support for custom page nar sizes m Faster foreground printing m Supports PhaserMatch custom profiles Lets you to disable background printing for printing large files LaserWriter 8 Apple 8 3 2 Required by some applications PageMaker m No support for PhaserMatch Slower foreground printing custom profiles Custom page sizes ColorSync support PSPrinter Adobe 8 3 1 Includes all features of the LaserWriter 8 driver m Slower foreground printing Supports PhaserMatch custom profiles ColorSync support Includes N Up and Watermark Phaser 600 GX For use with QuickDraw GX Supports PhaserMatch custom profiles
291. t the PhaserMatch application Refer to Which Windows driver to install for information on drivers that do You must have your original Windows NT 4 0 diskettes or CD ROM to complete this procedure You will need the printer s IP address for this procedure it may be available on the printer s configuration page If not ask your network administrator Log in as Administrator or a user with administrator rights Click on the Start button Select Settings then select Printer from the sub menu Double click on the Add Printer icon In the Printers dialog box Select one of these options then click Next a My Computer Locally installed and managed printer a Network Networked printer 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 4 0 cont d 4 5 If this is a locally connected printer click on the port that the printer is connected to a LPTx Parallel printer connection m COM Serial connected printer Add Port Networked printer Recommended connect via TCP IP by double clicking on the LPR Port If the LPR port is not listed in this box the Microsoft TCP IP Printing Services needs to be added to the NT machine The original Windows NT distribution diskettes are needed during installation Click Start Settings Control Panel Network Click on the Services tab then click Add Select Microsoft TCP IP Printing then click OK and install this service If Microsoft TCP IP Printing Serv
292. t two are printed on each piece of ANSI B Tabloid or larger media You can either use cut sheet media or roll media When you use roll media you can save media by rotating the image 90 or 270 These files automatically select ANSI B as the media size do not hand feed ANSI A media The PANTONE Sampler prints only ANSI A size pages You can either manually feed A sized cut sheets or use narrow roll media Setting Page Rotation to 90 or 270 you use less media PRINTING AND USING THE COLOR SAMPLER CHARTS 9480 137 SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Special printing features Click on the following topics for more information a Fusing Mode Media Fusing m Advance Media a Cut Media a Mirror Print m Page Centering a Page Rotation a Image Smoothing a Fast Preview a Print Preview a Color Control Strip a Reprint a Custom page sizes SPECIAL PRINTING FEATURES Fusing Mode Media Fusing This option is selected in Supported printer drivers and from the front panel Media Defaults menu It determines whether and in what manner the print is fused You can use this option with all media types and with both cut sheet and roll media Options m Cold default Flattens the dots of color which makes colors appear darker than if Media Fusing is set to None Colors that are cold fused are more resistant to flaking than non fused colors Hot Softens the ink and flattens the printed dots of color making the colors mor
293. t what you expected In general Select another Color Correction option in a supported driver and print your image again refer to Color corrections for more information on color correction If you are not using a supported driver and are sharing the printer with other users on a network another user may have changed the printer s color adjustment setting Refer to Sharing the printer on a network for more information on sharing a network printer PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED m f you use the driver s Use Printer Setting option and printed colors are not what you expected check the following A selection may have been made in the TekColor Correction menu on the printer s front panel These settings change the printer s color correction setting A color correction utility file may have been downloaded to the printer These files change the printer s color correction setting Refer to Sharing the printer on a network for details on how these settings affect prints made from a driver PhaserMatch provides the ability to customize the TekColor corrections Refer to PhaserMatch for more information on the PhaserMatch custom color profiles PRINTED COLORS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED Printing PANTONE Colors If Phaser 600 printer specific PANTONE Colors are not printing as expected Make sure that you are printing without any color corrections selected Refer to Using PANTONE Color Files for more informat
294. t you insert the media evenly see Cutting roll media CLEARING A MEDIA JAM Clearing a media jam 1 Cut the media if you are using roll media If not go to Step 2 With the paper roll cover open use a sharp knife such as the cutting tool included with the printer to trim the jammed media Use the printer s cutting guide to make a clean cut Move the printhead a Open the top cover b Using an object such as a pen move the hot printhead to the far right If you do not do this you might damage the printhead when you remove the media WARNING The printhead is hot To avoid injury do not use your hand to move the printhead CLEARING A MEDIA JAM 3 Move the fuser a Open the exit cover WARNING When lowering the exit cover be careful not to pinch your hand between the paper roll cover and the exit cover b Move the fuser to the far right or left side of the printer NOTE wy v This protects the fuser and releases tension between the fuser wheel and the media it also moves the cutter away from the jammed media 9480 113 CLEARING A MEDIA JAM 4 Remove the jammed media For all types of media jams always inspect the drum and rollers for any loose paper and remove it If paper extends outside the exit cover OR If paper does not extend outside the exit cover OR If paper is only visible inside the top cover m Close the exit cover Gently and evenly pull the media
295. tScript header information in the printer then click the Download button This option makes print files a little smaller and faster than the first option but you need to click the Download button every time the printer is turned off and on or reset a For better performance select the Binary Mode option PRINTING FROM A PC Using the Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 PostScript driver If you are using Microsoft Windows NT follow the instructions in Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 to set up a Windows NT PostScript driver with a Phaser 600 printer You can select printer page sizes in the driver for Windows NT applications however TekColor color corrections and other PostScript Level 2 features are not supported by the Windows NT driver Refer to Selecting print features for instructions on selecting color corrections from the printer s front panel or from downloadable utility files Refer to your Microsoft Windows NT documentation for details on features in the Windows NT driver PRINTING FROM A PC Using the Windows NT 4 0 PostScript driver If you are using Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 first follow the instructions in Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 4 0 to set up a printer driver for a Phaser 600 printer Then select TekColor color corrections and other printer features from the Windows NT driver NOTE sy 7v For information on installing a driver for a Windows NT 4 0 client on a Window
296. telephone If you are calling from outside the United States or Canada you ll need to know the international access code to reach your country from the United States Without a complete fax number HAL cannot call your fax machine Call 503 682 7450 direct or in the U S and Canada call 1 800 835 6100 Call only from a touch tone voice telephone At the prompt choose the option for technical documentation via fax USING THE AUTOMATED FAX SYSTEMS Follow through the voice prompted English menu Order individual documents by entering the desired document s number as listed in the HAL catalog Enter the number by using your telephone s keypad You can order up to three documents per call The HAL catalog or documents you request are faxed to you in a matter of minutes USING THE AUTOMATED FAX SYSTEMS Use EuroHAL in Europe EuroHAL includes many documents some in English and some in other European languages If a local version of the document you want is available EuroHAL will send it in your language Otherwise it will send English documents If you have a tone dial telephone and a fax machine you can use EuroHAL If your telephone has star and hash mark keys then it can probably use tones ask your local telephone supplier if you are not sure If your telephone does not have these keys or has a dial you will need to buy a tone dialer from your local telephone or electronics shop This small box is held
297. tensibility Request value into printer input latch on rising edge nSelectln 1284 Active C mode Negative true select printer N mode Used in conjunction with HostBusy for 1284 hardware handshaking nAutoFd HostBusy C mode Not used N mode Used in conjunction with 1284 Active for 1284 hardware handshaking Host Logic High Host Positive true host signals valid Negative true host signals invalid Peripheral Logic High Printer m Positive true printer on Negative true printer off Tektronix USING DIFFERENT PRINTER LANGUAGE MODES Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer The printer recognizes the following printer or page description languages m PostScript m HP GL Hewlett Packard s Graphics Language PC and workstation users who want to use applications that output data in these different language modes must first set up a printer port to receive data in a particular language Click on the following topics for more information Installing the files Setting PostScript and HP GL job and wait timeouts Changing the printer s language mode Testing printer language mode changes Setting default HP GL pen colors INSTALLING THE FILES Installing the files The utility files are available on the Phaser 600 printers CD ROM and diskette 1 Refer to PC Windows software for instructions on installing the printer s utility files Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdi
298. the following command where x is 1 2 or 3 COPY RESET PS COMx If your printer is connected to an optional Novell or TCP IP network you should follow the instructions provided with your network software CHANGING THE PRINTER S NAME Changing the printer s name This procedure lets you change the printer s name Click on the following topics for more information Changing the printers name from a Macintosh E Changing the printer s name from a PC CHANGING THE PRINTER S NAME Changing the printer s name from a Macintosh The printer s name has the following characteristics Is printed on the startup and configuration pages Is used by AppleTalk to identify the printer Appears in the Chooser Can be up to 31 characters long and may contain any printable characters except at sign and colon The default printer name is Phaser 600 If more than one printer with the same name appears in the same zone numbers are appended to the names of the printers added later for example Phaser 600 1 and Phaser 600 2 These numbered printers appear in the Chooser the actual printername is not changed A name change is persistent across printer power cycles CHANGING THE PRINTER S NAME NOTE wy v If you are using QuickDraw GX remove any desktop printer icons that refer to the old printer name and make new desktop printers after changing the printer s name Follow the instructions in Installing the Macintos
299. the CD ROM you can request files from the Tektronix anonymous ftp server If you can exchange electronic mail with other Internet sites you can access the Tektronix ftp server From this server you can retrieve driver and utility files and color printer information To log onto the Tektronix ftp server and download utility files follow these instructions 1 Type the following at the system prompt and press the Return key ftp ftp tek com The system responds Name ftp tek com lt login name gt INSTALLING THE UTILITY FILES Type anonymous and press the Return key The system responds Guest login ok send your complete e mail address as password Enter your e mail address and press the Return key Change directories to your printer specific directory cd Color Printers UNIX lt Tektronix printer gt utilities To download the utility files type the following command mget The system prompts you for each file in the directory to which you respond y yes or n no To exit the ftp session type quit or bye then press the Return key DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Downloading files to the printer Click on the following topics for more information m Downloading files from a Macintosh m Downloading files from a PC DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Downloading files from a Macintosh All of the PostScript utility files on the printers CD ROM can be downloaded to the printer with the Las
300. the U S A and Canada 586 Use EuroHAL in Europe 588 Front panel messages 592 Symptoms and solutions 596 Diagnostic tools 596 Maintaining print quality 597 Printing hints 618 Improving print speed 620 Relative port speed 621 Fastest print time 622 Printing bitmapped images 624 PostScript printing errors 630 Using a PostScript error handler 632 Fixing timeout problems in Windows 638 Printed colors are not what you expected 642 In general 642 Printing PANTONE Colors 644 Blue colors look too purple 645 Using the Tektronix halftone screens 646 Selecting page sizes in Windows applications 650 Fonts printing incorrectly from Windows 653 Sharing the printer on a network 655 If the LaserWriter Utility does not work AppleTalk 657 Media hints and tips 658 Cutting roll media 660 Startup page prints even though it is disabled 669 Clearing amedia jam 670 Ataglance 670 Overview 671 Clearing amedia jam 673 Clearing an ink jam 676 USING THE FRONT PANEL 681 Front panel 683 Front panel overview 684 Front panel indicators 685 Front panel buttons 686 Two line display 689 Printer information 690 Front panel menumap 691 Pause menu 693 Help Pages overview 695 Printing the front panel menu map 696 Printing the menu map from the front panel 697 Printing the menu map with PhaserLink software 698 Printing the configuration page 699 Printing the configuration page from the front panel 700 Printing the configuration page with a downloadable
301. the installer application Click on the following topics for more information Click Pantone overview to return to the main topics list USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Using the PANTONE Color templates m Using the Macintosh templates m Using the PC library files USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Using the Macintosh templates Click on the following topics for more information Adobe Illustrator 3 0 Macintosh Adobe Illustrator 5 0 Macintosh Aldus FreeHand 4 0 Macintosh Aldus PageMaker 5 0 Macintosh Adobe PageMaker 6 0 Macintosh Click Pantone overview to return to the main topics list USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Adobe Illustrator 3 0 Macintosh The PANTONE Phaser 600 ai file is used by the application to properly specify PANTONE Colors for the Phaser 600 printer See Installing the Macintosh files if you haven t already installed the files Locate the PANTONE Phaser 600 aifile in the Pantone Files folder inside the Phaser Tools folder on your hard disk Drag the PANTONE Phaser 600 ai file to the Illustrator application folder on your hard disk Use this file as a template to create documents for printing USING THE PANTONE COLOR TEMPLATES Adobe Illustrator 5 0 Macintosh The PANTONE Phaser 600 ai file is used by the application to properly specify PANTONE Colors for the Phaser 600 printer See Installing the Macintosh files if you haven t already in
302. the printer s 1 Gbyte internal SCSI hard drive or on an optional SCSI hard disk attached to the printer Refer to Using SCSI Hard Disks for more information on using an external SCSI disk for font storage You can download as many outline fonts as the printer s memory or hard disk allow Adding more printer memory expands the number of fonts that can be downloaded to the printer The printer accepts Type 1 and Type 3 downloadable fonts including those from Adobe Agfa Bitstream Microsoft Apple and many others The printer also accepts TrueType downloadable fonts which can be scaled to any point size TrueType fonts look the same on the screen as they do when printed You download a font from a PC or Macintosh the same way you download fonts to any PostScript printer Follow the documentation that was shipped with your fonts Macintosh screen fonts NOTE sy v If you already have these fonts installed on your computer you don t need to install them again The printer s diskettes and CD ROM contain Phaser Screen Fonts for the printer You need to install the screen fonts on your computer if you want to see the printer s standard resident typefaces on the Macintosh screen If you select a font the printer doesn t have the Macintosh creates a representative font for printing 1 Use either the Phaser 600 printer s diskettes or CD ROM Floppy diskettes Insert the Printer Software for Macintosh diskette into your co
303. the selected desktop printer This command cannot be used on a shared printer except by the Macintosh hosting the shared printer Select highlight a desktop printer icon Select Send PostScript File from the Printing menu Select the PostScript file you want to download Click Open to send the file to the printer DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Downloading files from a PC To use the printer s utility files send or download them to the printer from the communications port your printer is connected to Click on the following topics for more information m Downloading files from Windows 3 1 m Downloading files from Windows 95 EI Downloading files from DOS DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Downloading files from Windows 3 1 You can use the Copy command in the Windows File Manager to download PostScript files to the printer See Installing the PC utility files to locate the printer s utility files Select the utility file you want to send to the printer for example RESET PS From the File menu select Copy The Copy dialog box appears with the utility file you selected listed in the From field In the To field type the port your printer is connected to For example type LPT1 for a parallel port connection then click OK If the Confirm File Replace dialog box appears click Yes to continue the file is downloaded to the printer TAE sy v If your printer is connected to an optional Novell or TCP IP net
304. timeout option in the driver s Details tab to 950 seconds m Make sure that the correct port is selected in the driver s Details tab m If the error message Windows Header has not been downloaded to the printer appears on your computer screen click the PostScript tab and click one of the options for PostScript Header If you are using PC NFS If you have PC NFS software installed on your computer you need to make the following selection in the Network Options dialog box 1 From the Main window double click the Print Manager icon 2 From the Options menu in the Print Manager select Network Settings 3 In the Network Options dialog box uncheck the Print Net Jobs Direct box 4 Click OK SYMPTOMS AND SOLUTIONS If you can t make a print cont d Symptom Solution Printer not printing even though you ve configured a supported driver for your printer cont d Using the PS Error Handler Follow these steps to use the PostScript Error Handler after trying the previous suggestions 1 Set the PS Error Handler to on in the front panel s Printer Defaults menu 2 Use the error handler utility to determine what is wrong Refer to Using a PostScript error handler for information on using the error handler If you can t print from Windows to an LPT port Windows 3 1 1 Double click the Printers icon in the Control Panel 2 In the Printers dialog box choose your printer from the list o
305. ting m Online access information Contain printer drivers printer description files color sampler charts and utility files INFORMATION ROADMAP World Wide Web PhaserMatch User Manual PhaserShare manuals Phaser Copystation User Manual Contains the contents of this user manual the Adobe Acrobat Reader and supplemental information in Acrobat PDF format a Using the printers downloadable utility files a Printing HP GL files a Printing from workstations a Using PANTONE Colors For instructions on installing and using the Adobe Acrobat Reader to view PDF files refer to the README files on the CD ROM If you have access to the Internet you can view documentation topics and answers to Frequently Asked Questions available at Tektronix web site http www tek com Color_Printers userdoc introduction html Contains information on using the PhaserMatch software to create custom color profiles Contains complete information on setting up and using the PhaserShare ports Includes information for setting up and using the copystation with your printer Tektronix W4 GETTING SET UP Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer At a glance Installation of your printer involves these tasks 1 Unpacking the printer Use the Phaser 600 Quick Start Instructions to unpack the printer and remove it from the shipping pallet The Quick Start Instructions are attached to the top cover of the pr
306. ting the PC DOS diskette on a workstation 414 SGI IRIX versions 4 0 x and 5 415 Sun running Solaris 2 3 417 Sun running SunOS 4 1 3 420 Extracting files from unix tar 421 USING PRINTER UTILITIES 424 Installing the utility files 426 Installing the Macintosh utility files from the printers CD ROM 427 Installing the PC utility files 428 Downloading files from the Tektronix World Wide Web site 429 Downloading files from the Tektronix ftp server 430 Downloading files to the printer 432 Downloading files from a Macintosh 433 Downloading files from aPC 438 Changing the printer s name 442 Changing the printer s name from a Macintosh Changing the printer s name from aPC 445 Resetting the printer 447 Resetting the printer from a Macintosh 448 Resetting the printer from aPC 450 Using the color rendering intents 451 Descriptions 451 Selecting 456 Enabling and disabling job pipelining 459 Enable disable job pipelining from a Macintosh 460 Enable disable job pipelining from aPC 462 Modifying the Advance Media default 463 Modifying Advance Media from a Macintosh 464 Modifying Advance Media from aPC 466 Setting page offset 467 Setting page offset from a Macintosh 468 Setting page offset from aPC 470 Adding Control D characters to PC files 471 Configuring a printer s serial port 473 UsING SCSI HARD DISKS 480 Other utilities 477 SCSI peripheral devices 482 The following utility files are described in other Selecting a SCSI hard disk 483
307. tion Note Press and hold down the front panel s button for configuration information 6 Click OK click Close click OK Note See the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver User Guide on the printers CD ROM USRGUIDE PDF for detailed information on the AdobePS 3 driver 4 1 In the Control Panel double click Printers 2 Select the Tektronix Phaser 600 printer you installed in the above procedure click Connect 3 Select the port the printer is connected to click OK End PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 Note The Windows NT driver does not support the PhaserMatch application Refer to Which Windows driver to install for information on drivers that do You may need your original Windows NT setup diskettes or CD ROM to complete this procedure 1 If your computer has an Intel compatible processor such as the Intel 1386 go on to Step 2 If your computer is a MIPS Alpha or PowerPC edit the PRINTER INF file located in the WIN95_95 directory on the printers CD ROM or in the top level of the Windows 95 NT diskette a Copy these files to a new formatted diskette placing them at the top root level of the new diskette TEK1 PRINTER INF TKPH6001 PPD Standard configuration TKP600P1 PPD Extended Features option Note Press and hold down the printer s button on the front panel for configuration information b Open the copy of the PRINTER INF file on the
308. tion in Troubleshooting Clean the printer regularly as described in this chapter CLEANING HINTS Power can remain ON while cleaning Make sure that you use isopropyl alcohol that is at least 90 pure 99 yields the best results The Cleaning Kit that is shipped with the printer includes the following items Cleaning tool 1 4 Foam cleaning swabs wae Lint free cleaning cloths C 2 3 Empty bottle for isopropyl alcohol The replacement Cleaning Kit 016 1400 00 also includes 10 pre soaked alcohol cloths You can separately order a pack of 10 pre soaked alcohol cloths 006 7824 00 QUICK CLEANING Quick cleaning As a general rule you will get the best results from your printer if you perform these quick cleaning procedures once a week or according to how much media you have used Click on the following topics for more information Feed rollers and paper guides Transport rollers Drum QUICK CLEANING Feed rollers and paper guides Clean the feed rollers and paper guides after every 80 E size 34 x 44 in sheets of media approximately 100 m 300 ft of 36 inch wide roll media NOTE wy 7v If any paper is currently loaded remove it and set it aside To open the top cover lift the latch that is on the upper right side of the printer then lift the cover Moisten a lint free cloth with 90 pure isopropyl alcohol or use a pre soaked alcohol cloth QUICK CLEANING Wipe
309. tions described in Apple s documentation Paper Feed Manual When printing on manually fed media you need to select Manual in this dialog box and select the appropriate Manual Feed Media option in the TekColor printing extension see Using the TekColor printing extension for details PRINTING FROM QUICKDRAW GX APPLICATIONS Using the TekColor printing extension In the Print dialog box select the TekColor icon in the scrollable list at the left of the dialog box to see printer options NOTE sy v This dialog box is similar to the one that appears when you select Printer Driver Defaults from the Printing menu refer to Selecting printing options for details The default settings in this dialog box reflect the defaults for the selected desktop printer With most applications you can change the printing options and save those options with each document PRINTING FROM NON QUICKDRAW GX APPLICATIONS Printing from non QuickDraw GX applications If you are using non QuickDraw GX applications with the Phaser 600 GX driver the Page Setup and Print dialog boxes look similar to the standard LaserWriter driver However these dialog boxes have no printer specific options such as TekColor color corrections These dialog boxes reflect the selections made in the default desktop printer You cannot change these printer settings from an application but you can change them by selecting highlighting the default desktop printer and
310. to the phone and will send the standard tones that you need to talk to EuroHAL USING THE AUTOMATED FAX SYSTEMS To use EuroHAL dial one of the numbers listed in the following table Country Numbers Austria Belgium Denmark Finland Italy Norway Switzerland 00 44 1908 681 839 France 05 90 81 86 Germany 0130 819 220 Holland 09 44 1908 681 839 Spain 07 44 1908 681 839 Sweden O 09 44 1908 681 839 UK 01908 681 839 Other countries 44 1908 681 839 where is your country s International Access Code USING THE AUTOMATED FAX SYSTEMS EuroHAL answers and asks which language you want to use For English Press 1 For French Press 2 For German Press 3 The first time you use EuroHAL you should order a catalog The catalog lists all of the available documents and is continuously updated 4 USING THE AUTOMATED FAX SYSTEMS EuroHAL asks you for your fax machine number If you are calling from outside the UK add your country code first as shown in the following table Country Country code Your area code and fax number Press when finished Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland UK Other countries 00 43 00 32 00 45 00 358 00 33 00 49 00 31 00 39 00 47 00 34 00 46 00 41 OO xx area code area code area code area code
311. ton until the front panel displays this message Printer Defaults Ses Menu Press Menu Press the left arrow button this message appears PS Error Handler lt gt Menu Press Menu This message appears PS Error Handler Off lt gt Select The indicates the current selection off is the factory default POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS Press an arrow button The front panel displays this message PS Error Handler On lt gt Select 7 Press Select 8 Press the button until the front panel reads Ready After turning on the error handler resend the print job the printer produces an error page POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ERRORS Using the Macintosh error handler utility file NOTE sy v If you are using QuickDraw GX and System Software 7 5 you can download printer utilities from the Tektronix Phaser 600 GX printer driver refer to Downloading printer utilities or World Wide Web topics for instructions Follow the instructions in Macintosh software to install the utility files from the Phaser 600 CD ROM Select the appropriate printer in the Chooser Locate the LaserWriter Utility or the Apple Printer Utility in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click its icon to start the application Choose Download PostScript File from the Utilities menu Select the Tek Error Handler file from the list then click Open This file was installed in the Phaser 600 Utilities fold
312. tton action labels user adjustable parameter settings and printer information 9480 12 CD Front panel indicators The front panel includes these indicator lights 1 Power 2 Error Indicator On FRONT PANEL green LED red LED Blinking 9480 87 CD Off 1 Power The printer is on and ready for operation 2 Error m The printer is processing or printing an image The printer is in interactive mode you have pressed the Menu button The printer is performing a function such as warm up or cleaning that requires no user interaction If the Power indicator is lighted the printer requires immediate user interaction for example clear a media jam or close an open door Check the front panel message If the Power indicator is not lighted the printer detects a hardware error The printer is not ready or there is an error Normal operation there are no print engine or controller board errors Front panel buttons The front panel buttons function according to the state mode the printer is in Mode FRONT PANEL w gG 4 9480 88 Front Panel Buttons 1 2 3 Ready Normal operating mode Provides printer information when pressed and held down Refer to Printer information Cancel Pause Cancels ajob that Accesses the is printing or Pause menu processing Menu Accesse
313. turn to the Printers dialog box then click the Setup button A dialog box appears with the name of the printer you selected across the top Use this dialog box to select paper source paper size and image orientation PRINTING FROM A PC 8 From the Setup dialog box click the Options button to see the Options dialog box Refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation for details on the options in this dialog box m Make sure the Color check box is on to print in color Make sure the Send Header with Each Job check box is on NOTE wy cw The Header contains important PostScript information that must accompany each print job it is not a banner page printed with each job If this box is not checked an error message is displayed on your computer screen and your job does not print PRINTING FROM A PC From the Options dialog box click the Advanced button to see the Advanced Options dialog box Make sure the Use PostScript Level 2 Features check box is checked on TE g The Use PostScript Level 2 Features option affects the print time of bitmapped raster images by improving the image transfer time from the computer to the printer and by improving the image processing time in the printer This option is only available to applications that use this Tektronix driver with Tektronix PostScript Level 2 printers When this box is checked the Compress Bitmaps option is unavailable grayed out Click OK to return to the Options
314. twork and you know the location of the Windows directory on the network drive m If you use QuarkXPress In the QuarkXPress Installation Selections dialog box select Automatic Search or Choose Destination lf you are using a network copy of QuarkXPress select Choose Destination Follow the prompts then click Next To bypass Select Do not install m The next dialog box lists the items you have selected to install Click Back to change any selections Click Next when you have the selections you want 4 PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Installing printer software for Windows cont d 4 6 Another installer program is launched that installs or sets up the drivers except for the Tektronix driver for Windows 3 1 Each driver has a unique installation procedure follow the steps then return to Step 7 on this page Setting up the drivers for Windows 95 m Microsoft PostScript driver m Adobe PostScript driver Setting up the drivers for Windows 3 1 m Tektronix driver m Adobe PostScript driver Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 m PostScript driver Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 3 5 and 3 51 m Setting up on a network Setting up a PostScript driver for Windows NT 4 0 m PostScript driver Setting up the printer on a network for Windows NT 4 0 m Setting up on a network If you are using the printer s CD ROM and you selected Easy Install or PhaserMatch under the Custom I
315. ty file Tektronix 7 USING THE PHASERPRINT PLUG IN FOR PHOTOSHOP Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer OVERVIEW Overview The PhaserPrint plug in operates within the Photoshop application to improve the image data transfer time from your computer to your printer The Phaser 600 printers CD ROM and the printer software diskette contain the PhaserPrint plug in file for use with Photoshop and Phaser 600 printers and other supported Tektronix printers PhaserPrint software produces correct output only on supported printers If you use this plug in with a printer not listed in the PhaserPrint dialog box the image may be placed incorrectly on the page or colors may look incorrect or your file may not print Click on the following topics for more information Compatibility a Installing the PhaserPrint plug in for Photoshop m Using the plug in COMPATIBILITY Compatibility PhaserPrint software is compatible with the following computers Macintosh Photoshop 2 5 1 and higher System 7 0 and higher The PhaserPrint plug in also works under QuickDraw GX if your default desktop printer refers to a printer Supported by the PhaserPrint software Windows Photoshop 3 0 and higher Windows 95 Windows NT or Windows 3 1 with Win 32s installed optional TCP IP support requires proper installation of IP networking software and cards INSTALLING THE PHASERPRINT PLUG IN FOR PHOTOSHOP Installin
316. u L___ Paused Cs Reprint Feed Cut Lo Reprint x C 5 Scale Copies Print Scale 100 Copies 1 CS T gt Select CS y gt Select XX Available with Extended Features 9480 111 FRONT PANEL Reprint The Reprint function is available in the front panel s Pause menu if an Extended Features option is installed It allows you to reprint the last PostScript image specifying the number of copies and the scale of the image For more detailed information refer to Reprint HELP PAGES OVERVIEW Help Pages overview The printer has several Helo Pages that you can print to learn more about the printer Help page Description Printing the front panel menu map Provides a graphical view of the front panel menus Printing the configuration page Lists general information on printer settings and how the printer is configured Printing the startup page Lists the number of pages printed installed interface ports software version numbers installed RAM memory the number of fonts and other useful information Test Print Provides a test pattern to diagnose print quality problems Available through the Utilities menu PRINTING THE FRONT PANEL MENU MAP Printing the front panel menu map The front panel menu map provides a convenient navigation aid for quickly determining the location of menu items There are two ways to print the front panel menu m
317. u c Select None in the Color Corrections pop up menu d Click OK USING COLORSYNC ON A MACINTOSH 8 Click Print in the Print dialog box NOTE x 4 v If printed colors are not what you expected refer to Printing Beyond the Basics for more information about color USING HOST COLOR CORRECTION IN WINDOWS 95 Using host color correction in Windows 95 NOTE sy v Host color correction is available only with Windows 95 Color correction from the host your computer attempts to match the screen s colors to the printer s colors The software for the Phaser 600 printer includes a profile that contains specific color information required by the host color correction system You can adjust an image s colors on the computer or use the TekColor color corrections to adjust an image s colors in the printer You should use only one color correction method at a time or you may get unexpected results USING HOST COLOR CORRECTION IN WINDOWS 95 To use host color correction do the following steps 1 Refer to PC Windows software for instructions on installing a PostScript printer driver for Windows 95 The printer s color profile is automatically installed with a driver In the Printers window move the cursor over the Phaser 600 printer icon and click the right mouse button In the menu that appears click Properties the Properties dialog box appears Click the Graphics tab In the Color Control field sel
318. u are using printing is as easy as dragging a document onto a desktop printer icon NOTE sy v If you want to rename the printer listed in the Chooser do so before creating any desktop printers If you rename the printer in the Chooser any desktop printers referring to that printer will not work and must be removed to the Trash and recreated See Changing the printers name from a Macintosh for instructions on using the LaserWriter Utility to rename the printer Select Chooser from the Apple menu Click the Phaser 600 GX printer driver icon on the left side of the Chooser A list appears with the printers available on your network If the printer driver icon does not appear Restart your Macintosh and repeat the printer driver installation procedure also check the cable connections on your computer and printer CREATING A DESKTOP PRINTER In the Connect via field s pop up menu select your printer s communication method m The AppleTalk option is the standard network connection The Servers option is used to select a shared desktop printer see Setting up a shared printer for details Click on your Phaser 600 printer in the list of printers on the right side of the Chooser Click the Create button to create a desktop printer An icon of the printer appears on the desktop with the same name as the printer selected in the Chooser Close the Chooser by clicking its close box SETTING UP UNIQUE DESKTOP P
319. u turn on the printer Printer ports The printer is shipped with a SCSI port and parallel port on the printer s rear panel Additionally the printer can support one optional PhaserShare network card All ports and network protocols are simultaneously active The printer accepts print jobs on a first come first served basis NOTE sy v See Ordering Interface cables and adapters about ordering cables for connecting the printer SCSI standard For connecting these optional peripheral devices Phaser Copystation To set up and connect the Phaser Copystation to your printer refer to Chapter 2 of the Phaser Copystation User Manual Required SCSI ID numbers are 5 and 6 Refer to Phaser Copystation for ordering information External SCSI hard disk Provides additional storage for downloadable fonts the printer has an internal 1 Gbyte SCSI hard disk You can connect one or more SCSI external hard disks to the printer available SCSI ID numbers are 0 1 2 3 CONNECTING THE PRINTER 9480 09 CONNECTING THE PRINTER Parallel standard The printer supports a standard uni directional parallel port The port can also be set for bi directional communications using downloadable utility files available on the printers CD ROM diskettes or from your World Wide Web browser m Use a high density bi directional parallel cable available from most computer cable vendors or order a
320. umber of copies to print from 1 to 1000 USING THE PLUG IN Print using Macintosh The Print using pop up menu allows you to choose between printing an image or saving the image to disk AppleTalk This option prints the image to the printer currently selected in the Chooser When you select this option The Printer model field displays the name of the printer currently selected in the Chooser If the selected printer is not a PostScript printer this option is unavailable grayed out PostScript file This option lets you save an image to disk as a PostScript Level 2 file When you click the Save button another dialog box appears allowing you to choose a new or existing file for saving the PostScript code Also when you select this option the File format pop up menu becomes available This pop up menu has two options ASCII base 85 and Binary ASCII base 85 This option encodes image data using an ASCII 85 filter during file output making the resulting PostScript file portable so it can be downloaded through interface ports that don t support binary data Note that the file may be up to 25 larger Binary This option outputs image data in binary format USING THE PLUG IN Print using Windows The Print using pop up menu allows you to choose between printing an image or saving the image to disk It has from two to four options depending on your system configuration m TCP IP This option is available if a TCP
321. upport bi directional status reporting BI DIRECTIONAL STATUS REPORTING NOTE wy v The printer is shipped with the uni directional mode enabled Follow the instructions in PC Windows software to install the printer s software Select Easy Install to automatically install the software or select the Printer Utilities item in the Custom Install Utilities window Locate the files in the PHSR600 subdirectory inside the PHSRTOOL directory created on your hard disk by the installer application Select one of the following files m Use the BIDIR PS file to enable bi directional status reporting on a parallel port m Use the UNIDIR PS file to disable bi directional status reporting Use one of the following methods to send the desired file to the printer m PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager a Workstation users Send the file to the printer as you would any PostScript file PARALLEL PORT PIN SIGNALS Parallel port pin signals This table shows the parallel port s connected pins other pins are not connected Parallel port signals Pin Signal mode names Return Signal Description Compatibility Nibble pin source Busy PtrBusy 19 Printer C mode Positive true not ready for data N mode Data bits 3 then 7 then busy status Select Xflag Printer C mode Positive true online N mode Data bits 1 then 5 nAck Pt
322. ures of the Tektronix m Harder to use than the Tektronix driver and more driver Similar to Windows 95 driver Supports PhaserMatch custom profiles Microsoft PostScript Standard driver for Windows 95 m No support for PhaserMatch ColorSync support eurton proies AdobePS 4 PostScript driver Includes all features of the Microsoft Windows 95 driver Supports PhaserMatch custom profiles Includes N Up and Watermark Windows NT 3 5 3 51 PostScript drivers Windows NT Includes printer specific features J No suppan for Prnesaieien Windows NT 4 0 PostScript custom profiles driver Custom Install or Easy Install Installer options Software Description PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Installed directory Custom Install Easy Install Windows 95 Windows 3 1 Samplers QuarkXPress PDF File PhaserPrint Pantone Files Microsoft Windows 95 PostScript driver Tektronix PostScript driver Color sampler charts and a font sampler Installs tkoh6001 pdf if application is present PhaserPrint plug in for Adobe Photoshop for Windows Pantone color charts phsrtool samplers pdf inside application directory phsrtool photoshp move to plugins inside application directory phsrtool pantone Windows 95 Windows NT Windows 3 1 Pantone Files Printer Utilities Network Utilities PhaserMatch Manuals Adobe Acrobat Reader AdobePS 4 PostScript driver Files for using a
323. use 196 how to use 195 problems with 642 special considerations _215 working with 195 color charts CMYK 255 HSB _255 important notes 262 PANTONE _301 printing from a Macintosh 264 from aPC 272 RGB 255 Color Control Strip _238 color corrections _219 Commercial Press 205 Euroscale Press 205 from an application 217 front panel selection 152 host Windows 95 _282 Monochrome 211 JK LMNOPQRSTUV W X Y Z no corrections _202 selecting 155 selecting the best 197 Simulate Display _204 SNAP Press _205 SWOP Press _205 use printer setting 212 Vivid Color _203 with an unsupported driver 218 with printer on a network 216 Color Printer Information Server 583 email address 583 information types available _583 ColorStix ink sticks 537 ordering _729 ColorSync using 277 commands DOS COPY command using 441 MODE command using 396 Commercial Press color correction description _205 selecting from the front panel 152 selecting in a Macintosh driver 125 selecting in a Windows driver 83 using a utility file 477 communication ports 110 CompuServe 581 CONFIG PS PC utility file 518 configuration descriptions 2 configuration page 596 printing _699 from a Macintosh _702 froma PC 704 from the front panel _700 configuring a serial port PC 473 connecting power _34 connecting printer ports 28 connections network 31 parallel cables 30 power 32 SCSI port 482 Control D PC utility files _471 copyright information _762 Copystation 13 24
324. using mode If Image Smoothing is activated Number of non resident fonts used IMPROVING PRINT SPEED Of these elements only the time contributed by the printer s paper marking speed the time it takes the printer to put the ink on the paper once it has received the processed image is predictable the others can vary greatly depending on your system configuration and the type of image you are printing However the printer printer s PostScript interpreter combines very fast image processing and communication with sophisticated memory management to keep the total print time to a minimum The printer s optimum image processing throughput via a dedicated Ethernet connection is about 200 Kbytes per second Actual throughput will generally be somewhat slower than this depending on network traffic image complexity color correction and memory configuration For details on the printer s paper marking speed see Specifications IMPROVING PRINT SPEED Printing bitmapped images If you tried to print a document with bitmapped images but are dissatisfied with the speed of the output here are some suggestions Click on the following topics for more information All users Macintosh users Windows 3 1 users using the Tektronix driver Windows 95 users UNIX workstation users IMPROVING PRINT SPEED All users When you use any color correction option other than None your printer can take longer to process bitmapped image
325. utility file 701 Printing the configuration page with PhaserLink software 705 Printing the startup page 706 Printing the startup page from the front panel 707 Printing the startup page with a downloadable utility file 708 Printing the startup page with PhaserLink software 712 Enabling and disabling the startup page 713 Enabling and disabling the startup page from the front panel 714 Enabling and disabling the startup page with a downloadable utility file 716 Enabling and disabling the startup page with PhaserLink software 719 Enabling and disabling front panel menus 720 ORDERING INFORMATION 726 Tektronix Printer and Tektronix Supplies Made For Each Other 727 Customizing your printer 728 Ordering printer supplies 729 Ordering Interface cables and adapters 732 Expanding your printing system 734 Upgrade kits 735 Extended Features upgrade 736 Memory upgrade 738 PhaserShare network cards 740 Phaser Copystation 741 PhaserPrint 742 PhaserSym 743 SCSI hard disk 744 REGULATORY INFORMATION 745 INDEX 769 Overview 746 Canadian EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility regulatory standards 747 Declaration of conformity for 220 230 VAC equipment 748 FCC Class B device for 100 120 VAC equipment 750 Material Safety Data Sheets 752 MSDS for ink 753 Specifications 759 Copyrights Trademarks 762 Phaser 600 Warranty 765 Users safety summary 766 Tektronix 7 INTRODUCTION Phaser 600 Wide Format Color Printer
326. vers set in the printer with downloadable utility files or set from the printer s front panel COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION TekColor color corrections are performed in the printer To use ColorSync color matching on a Macintosh or to use host color correction in Windows 95 refer to Color Matching or Tektronix World Wide Web site for additional information NOTE S TekColor color corrections do not affect colors specified in the PostScript Level 2 international color standard CIE Based ABC developed by the Commission Internationale de Eclairage International Commission on Illumination COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION PhaserMatch With support for PhaserMatch custom profiles users are now better able to match a specific press paper and ink PhaserMatch software for PC and Macintosh platforms provides a simple approach for creating and editing color profiles It is designed for the most demanding users who need to consistently and accurately predict and control colors The profiles can be created by adjusting dot gain controlling density on color reproduction curves to simulate the color output of the target press For detailed information and instructions on using PhaserMatch software refer to the PhaserMatch User Manual COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION Deciding which color correction to use Color printers and computer display screens produce col
327. view for all PC and Macintosh platforms These are the basic steps to software installation 1 Decide which driver you want to install Windows See Which Windows driver to install Macintosh See Which Macintosh driver to install 2 Decide which installation option Easy or Custom you want Windows See Custom Install or Easy Install Macintosh See Custom Install or Easy Install 3 Install the printers software according to your platform specific procedures a Select one Easy Install A pre defined list of drivers PPDs utility files Custom Install A custom selected list of drivers PPDs utility files software applications b Follow the on screen prompts 4 Set up a driver for use with your printer a Follow the instructions for the driver you installed To begin the platform specific installation procedures PC Windows Turn to PC Windows software now Macintosh Turn to Macintosh software now PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE PC Windows software Click on the following topics for more information m Which Windows driver to install m Custom Install or Easy Install PC WINDOWS SOFTWARE Which Windows driver to install Operating system Driver Features Notes Tektronix Microsoft 3 58 m Simple familiar interface for m Fewer features than Adobe Windows 3 1 users PostScript 3 0 1 Supports PhaserMatch custom profiles Custom page sizes Windows 3 1 AdobePS 3 PostScript driver Includes all feat
328. will be using for final prints For best results use the roll paper supplied by Tektronix m Printing from Acrobat Macintosh a Printing from Acrobat PC Click Pantone overview to return to the main topics list PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART Printing from Acrobat Macintosh 1 When you install the Pantone Files from the printers CD ROM also install the Acrobat Reader Alias from the Custom Install window see Installing the Macintosh files for instructions Locate the Acrobat Reader Alias in the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk and double click the alias the original source on the printers CD ROM opens Follow the on screen instructions to install Acrobat Reader onto your hard disk Once Acrobat Reader is installed locate the PANTONE Phaser 600 paffile in the Pantone Files folder inside the PhaserTools folder on your hard disk Double click the file to launch Acrobat Reader and open the file PRINTING THE PANTONE COLOR SAMPLER CHART View and print pages from the color sampler chart file as desired You can manually feed Letter size media or use roll media If you are printing from a supported driver such as Adobe PSPrinter or Phaser 600 GX Print your document with the following selections Any other selections in the driver will cause the PANTONE Colors to print differently Set Media size to Letter Set Color Correction to None Set the Print Quality to Standard Set Fusing to Co
329. work you should follow the instructions provided with your network software DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Downloading files from Windows 95 Use the DOS COPY command to send the desired file to the printer To find the DOS prompt follow this procedure 1 Click Start in the taskbar on your screen 2 In the menu that appears select Programs 3 Select MS DOS Prompt from the list See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files EI If your printer is connected to the parallel LPT port type the following command where x is 1 2 or 3 COPY RESET PS LPTx If your printer is connected to the optional serial COM port type the following command where xis 1 2 or 3 COPY RESET PS COMx If your printer is connected to an optional Novell or TCP IP network you should follow the instructions provided with your network software DOWNLOADING FILES TO THE PRINTER Downloading files from DOS You can use the DOS COPY command to download PostScript files to the printer See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files Use the DOS COPY command to send the desired file to the printer For example to reset the printer you would send the RESET PS file to the printer m If your printer is connected to the parallel LPT port type the following command where x is 1 2 or 3 COPY RESET PS LPTx If your printer is connected to the optional serial COM port type
330. x World Wide Web site COLOR CORRECTIONS MAKING THE BEST SELECTION If you are using an unsupported driver If you are not using one of the printer drivers shipped with the printer or another PPD driven driver then use the downloadable utility files or the printer s front panel to select color corrections see Using the Front Panel and Downloading files to the printer for details PRINTING AND USING THE COLOR SAMPLER CHARTS Printing and using the color sampler charts You can print color sampler charts from your printer to see how the colors as specified from within an application will look when printed Having a pre printed sample of each color can help you save time in selecting the right color for your use The printer s color sampler files are available from a variety of sources according to the following table Color Sampler Charts Accessing the charts CMYK sampler chart Print from CD ROM or Download from and Diskettes World Wide Web Cyan magenta yellow and black color model See Printing the Color Visit the Tektronix web site Sampler Charts http www tek com Color_Printer s support RGB sampler chart Red green and blue i l color model or use PhaserLink software to print sampler charts from your web HSB sampler chart browser Hue saturation and brightness color model PANTONE sampler chart The CMYK RGB and HSB Samplers are formatted as ANSI A Letter sized media bu
331. x 4 Ny If the blade is especially dirty you may need to add more alcohol to the lint free cloth or use a new cloth 9480 19 OCCASIONAL CLEANING Cleaning the paper clamp CAUTION Make sure that you have set the printer s front panel to clean Paper Clamp Setting the front panel for cleaning access this allows easy access to the parts of the printer that need to be cleaned OCCASIONAL CLEANING Using a lint free cloth that has been moistened with 90 pure isopropyl alcohol and inserted into the cleaning tool see Cleaning the paper clamp place the V opening of the tool over the paper clamp Clean the clamp by wiping back and forth 3 4 times with gentle pressure Clean a small section at a time and repeat the process until the entire clamp is clean UTION The paper clamp is more flexible than the back tension blade when cleaning the clamp do not use as much pressure as in the previous procedure or you might bend the clamp Do not twist the tool when cleaning or you might bend the clamp or catch the cloth on the clamp s cutouts a OCCASIONAL CLEANING Clamp rollers The clamp rollers are located behind the drum Clean them when you notice ink offsetting or ink smears on your prints 1 Use a foam swab from the cleaning kit that has been moistened with 90 pure isopropyl alcohol Clean the surface of the roller by rubbing it with the swab Rotate the drum away from
332. x or type in a new name Click Save to send the file to the printer If no output is returned by the printer the LaserWriter Utility displays a dialog box click OK to continue ENABLING AND DISABLING JOB PIPELINING Enable disable job pipelining from a PC See Installing the utility files to locate the printer s utility files Select one of the following files m Use the PIPE_ON PS file to turn on print job pipelining m Use the PIPE_OFFPS file to turn off print job pipelining Use one of the following methods to send the desired file to the printer a PC users Use the DOS COPY command to send the file to the printer Windows 3 1 users can also use the Copy command in the File Manager Workstation users Send a file to the printer as you would any PostScript file MODIFYING THE ADVANCE MEDIA DEFAULT Modifying the Advance Media default The amount the media is advanced is measured in points the default is 72 points one inch You can use the Advance Media ADVMEDIA PS file to change the default advance distance The new default value remains in the printer s memory even between printer power cycles NOTE wy v For more information on the Advance Media options see Advance Media Click on the following topics for instructions m Modifying Advance Media from a Macintosh m Modifying Advance Media from a PC MODIFYING THE ADVANCE MEDIA DEFAULT Modifying Advance Media from a Macintosh 1
333. y MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS Cutting roll media If the roll media misfeeds because of a jagged or crooked leading edge follow these rules m Replace the cutter if the medias leading edge is jagged see Removing the fuser components for instructions Make sure that the knife you use for manual cutting has a new sharp blade If you are using very thick media such as canvas or fabric cut it manually with the cutting tool provided with the printer rather than use the automatic cutter Make sure that the leading edge of the roll media is straight the angles on the corners of the leading edge should be 90 If it is not follow these steps 1 Open the paper roll cover 2 Lift the latch on the top cover make sure that you leave the cover closed Insert the roll media under the top cover Align the media with the guide on the printer to make sure that it is inserted evenly Lower the top cover latch to secure the media MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS 9480 90 MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS 5 With the paper roll cover open use a sharp knife Such as the cutting tool included with the printer to trim the media Use the printer s cutting guide to make a clean cut 9480 106 6 Lift the top covers latch remove and discard the cut strip of media MEDIA HINTS AND TIPS 7 Press down on the top cover latch to lock it 8 Holding the media by the edges feed it into the printer evenly until it stops Make su
334. you toward the back of the printer this rotates the clamp rollers Clean the entire surface of the roller UTION Do not pull the roller away from the drum the metal that attaches it to the printer is very flexible and can be permanently bent Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each of the rollers OCCASIONAL CLEANING Fuser shuttle and exit rollers When you notice ink offsetting most often occurring when fusing is turned on or ink smears most often occurring when fusing is turned off on your prints you can do the following Clean the fuser shuttle and fuser wheel 9480 68 Replace the fuser components Clean the exit rollers The fuser kit order number 016 1472 00 contains these replaceable parts 2 foam oiler wheels Replace when you replace the fuser wheel 2 fuser wheels Replace after printing 100 200 E size 34 x 44 in sheets approximately 100 200 m 300 600 ft of 36 inch wide media roll 2 cutters Replace if paper cuts appear jagged or your printer experiences exit jams due to the cutter OCCASIONAL CLEANING Setting the front panel NOTE sy v Make sure that the media roll is not loaded and the printer s front panel displays Ready On the printer s front panel press the Menu button the printer displays this message Help Pages lt gt Menu Press the arrow button gt until you see this message Utilities lt gt Menu Press the Menu button the printer displays this me
335. you need to set up the printer s port Refer to Printing the configuration page for instructions on printing a configuration page Interface Select Then do the following Parallel LPTx Go to Step 6 Network Network port 1 Click the Network button to open the LPTx or COMx Printers Network Connections dialog box 2 Fill in each item based on your configuration then click OK Refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation for details or ask your network administrator for help Serial Set up the serial port NOTE vy You can use the FILE port to save a document to a PostScript file instead of sending it to the printer For more information see your Microsoft Windows documentation PRINTING FROM A PC Set the Timeouts These options regulate your computer s communications with its printer ports Device Not Selected Type a value from 0 to 999 in this text box to change the number of seconds Windows waits before notifying you that a printer is off line The default is 15 seconds Transmission Retry On large or multiple page documents you may see an Alert message that the printer is no longer accepting data before the job is completely downloaded to the printer When using a shared printer you should set this option to a larger value such as 900 seconds 15 minutes to avoid these unnecessary timeouts Type a value between 45 and 999 in this text box the default setting is 45 seconds Click OK to re
336. your printing system Click on the following topics for more information Upgrade kits Extended Features upgrade Memory upgrade PhaserShare network cards Phaser Copystation PhaserPrint PhaserSym SCSI hard disk EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM Upgrade kits Order number Description 4685F 16 16 Mbyte SIMM for adding memory Option 16 see Advantages of adding memory Z480F32 32 Mbyte SIMM for adding memory Option 32 see Advantages of adding memory Z600FX Extended Features SIMM for 22 additional fonts Copystation support Print Preview feature and Reprint feature Z600FJ Extended Features SIMM for Kanji fonts Copystation support Print Preview feature and Reprint feature Z350FP 1 Ethernet networking card upgrade kit includes EtherTalk and Novell NetWare protocols Option P1 Z350FP3 LocalTalk networking card upgrade kit includes LocalTalk protocol and RS 232 serial interface Option P3 Z350FP4 Token Ring Networking Card upgrade kit Option P4 Z350DSK Phaser SCSI hard disk Z600SS Media Startup Kit 4540 Phaser Copystation accessory adds color copying capability to your Tektronix Phaser printer EXPANDING YOUR PRINTING SYSTEM Extended Features upgrade In its standard configuration the Phaser 600 printer offers 8 or 24 or 40 Mbytes of RAM memory 17 fonts support for PhaserMatch custom color matching profiler and Phas

Tektronix Phaser 600 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents